Bram Moolenaar | e06c188 | 2010-07-21 22:05:20 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 1 | *syntax.txt* For Vim version 7.3b. Last change: 2010 Jul 21 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2 | |
| 3 | |
| 4 | VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar |
| 5 | |
| 6 | |
| 7 | Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring* |
| 8 | |
| 9 | Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or |
| 10 | color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim |
| 11 | doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its |
| 12 | limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody |
| 13 | calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that. |
| 14 | |
| 15 | Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary |
| 16 | terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the |
| 17 | GUI version, gvim. |
| 18 | |
| 19 | In the User Manual: |
| 20 | |usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting. |
| 21 | |usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file. |
| 22 | |
| 23 | 1. Quick start |:syn-qstart| |
| 24 | 2. Syntax files |:syn-files| |
| 25 | 3. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading| |
| 26 | 4. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks| |
| 27 | 5. Defining a syntax |:syn-define| |
| 28 | 6. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments| |
| 29 | 7. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern| |
| 30 | 8. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster| |
| 31 | 9. Including syntax files |:syn-include| |
| 32 | 10. Synchronizing |:syn-sync| |
| 33 | 11. Listing syntax items |:syntax| |
| 34 | 12. Highlight command |:highlight| |
| 35 | 13. Linking groups |:highlight-link| |
| 36 | 14. Cleaning up |:syn-clear| |
| 37 | 15. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight| |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 38 | 16. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax| |
| 39 | 17. Color xterms |xterm-color| |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 40 | |
| 41 | {Vi does not have any of these commands} |
| 42 | |
| 43 | Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been |
| 44 | disabled at compile time. |
| 45 | |
| 46 | ============================================================================== |
| 47 | 1. Quick start *:syn-qstart* |
| 48 | |
| 49 | *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable* |
| 50 | This command switches on syntax highlighting: > |
| 51 | |
| 52 | :syntax enable |
| 53 | |
| 54 | What this command actually does is to execute the command > |
| 55 | :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim |
| 56 | |
| 57 | If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find |
| 58 | the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just |
| 59 | fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the |
| 60 | directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files |
| 61 | are in the "/usr/vim/vim50/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to |
| 62 | "/usr/vim/vim50". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim. |
| 63 | |
| 64 | *:syn-on* *:syntax-on* |
| 65 | The ":syntax enable" command will keep your current color settings. This |
| 66 | allows using ":highlight" commands to set your preferred colors before or |
| 67 | after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the |
| 68 | defaults, use: > |
| 69 | :syntax on |
| 70 | < |
| 71 | *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal* |
| 72 | If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background |
| 73 | with: > |
| 74 | :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White |
| 75 | For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|. |
| 76 | For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|. |
| 77 | |
| 78 | NOTE: The syntax files on MS-DOS and Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>. |
| 79 | The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of |
| 80 | file for your system. Although on MS-DOS and Windows the right format is |
| 81 | automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty. |
| 82 | |
| 83 | NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value |
| 84 | of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 85 | reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 86 | used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 87 | highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 88 | |
| 89 | :gui " open window and set default for 'background' |
| 90 | :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors |
| 91 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 92 | NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 93 | foreground! Use ":gui -f" then. |
| 94 | |
| 95 | |
| 96 | You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command > |
| 97 | :if exists("syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif |
| 98 | |
| 99 | To put this into a mapping, you can use: > |
| 100 | :map <F7> :if exists("syntax_on") <Bar> |
| 101 | \ syntax off <Bar> |
| 102 | \ else <Bar> |
| 103 | \ syntax enable <Bar> |
| 104 | \ endif <CR> |
| 105 | [using the |<>| notation, type this literally] |
| 106 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 107 | Details: |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 108 | The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how |
| 109 | this works, look in the file: |
| 110 | command file ~ |
| 111 | :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim |
| 112 | :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim |
| 113 | :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim |
| 114 | :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim |
| 115 | Also see |syntax-loading|. |
| 116 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 117 | NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting |
| 118 | makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value. |
| 119 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 120 | ============================================================================== |
| 121 | 2. Syntax files *:syn-files* |
| 122 | |
| 123 | The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in |
| 124 | a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the |
| 125 | name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters, |
| 126 | a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem). |
| 127 | Examples: |
| 128 | c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim |
| 129 | cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim |
| 130 | |
| 131 | The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But |
| 132 | the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a |
| 133 | language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one, |
| 134 | for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: > |
| 135 | :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim |
| 136 | |
| 137 | The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: > |
| 138 | :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim |
| 139 | :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim |
| 140 | These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim. |
| 141 | |
| 142 | |
| 143 | MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile* |
| 144 | |
| 145 | When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these |
| 146 | automatically with ":syntax enable", do this: |
| 147 | |
| 148 | 1. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item |
| 149 | of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: > |
| 150 | mkdir ~/.vim |
| 151 | |
| 152 | 2. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: > |
| 153 | mkdir ~/.vim/syntax |
| 154 | |
| 155 | 3. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write |
| 156 | it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: > |
| 157 | :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim |
| 158 | |
| 159 | Now you can start using your syntax file manually: > |
| 160 | :set syntax=mine |
| 161 | You don't have to exit Vim to use this. |
| 162 | |
| 163 | If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|. |
| 164 | |
| 165 | If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user |
| 166 | to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'. |
| 167 | |
| 168 | |
| 169 | ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add* |
| 170 | |
| 171 | If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to |
| 172 | add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps: |
| 173 | |
| 174 | 1. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above. |
| 175 | |
| 176 | 2. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: > |
| 177 | mkdir ~/.vim/after |
| 178 | mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax |
| 179 | |
| 180 | 3. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For |
| 181 | example, to change the colors for the C syntax: > |
| 182 | highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green |
| 183 | |
| 184 | 4. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the |
| 185 | syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: > |
| 186 | :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim |
| 187 | |
| 188 | That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be |
| 189 | different. You don't even have to restart Vim. |
| 190 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 5313dcb | 2005-02-22 08:56:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 191 | If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name. |
| 192 | All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example: |
| 193 | ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim |
| 194 | ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim |
| 195 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 196 | |
| 197 | REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace* |
| 198 | |
| 199 | If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new |
| 200 | version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure |
| 201 | that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'. |
| 202 | Vim will only load the first syntax file found. |
| 203 | |
| 204 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 205 | NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18* |
| 206 | |
| 207 | A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of |
| 208 | thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color. |
| 209 | A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself. |
| 210 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 211 | The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits |
| 212 | and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*" |
| 213 | |
| 214 | To be able to allow each user to pick his favorite set of colors, there must |
| 215 | be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages. |
| 216 | These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly |
| 217 | you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"): |
| 218 | |
| 219 | *Comment any comment |
| 220 | |
| 221 | *Constant any constant |
| 222 | String a string constant: "this is a string" |
| 223 | Character a character constant: 'c', '\n' |
| 224 | Number a number constant: 234, 0xff |
| 225 | Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false |
| 226 | Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10 |
| 227 | |
| 228 | *Identifier any variable name |
| 229 | Function function name (also: methods for classes) |
| 230 | |
| 231 | *Statement any statement |
| 232 | Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc. |
| 233 | Repeat for, do, while, etc. |
| 234 | Label case, default, etc. |
| 235 | Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc. |
| 236 | Keyword any other keyword |
| 237 | Exception try, catch, throw |
| 238 | |
| 239 | *PreProc generic Preprocessor |
| 240 | Include preprocessor #include |
| 241 | Define preprocessor #define |
| 242 | Macro same as Define |
| 243 | PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc. |
| 244 | |
| 245 | *Type int, long, char, etc. |
| 246 | StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc. |
| 247 | Structure struct, union, enum, etc. |
| 248 | Typedef A typedef |
| 249 | |
| 250 | *Special any special symbol |
| 251 | SpecialChar special character in a constant |
| 252 | Tag you can use CTRL-] on this |
| 253 | Delimiter character that needs attention |
| 254 | SpecialComment special things inside a comment |
| 255 | Debug debugging statements |
| 256 | |
| 257 | *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links |
| 258 | |
| 259 | *Ignore left blank, hidden |
| 260 | |
| 261 | *Error any erroneous construct |
| 262 | |
| 263 | *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the |
| 264 | keywords TODO FIXME and XXX |
| 265 | |
| 266 | The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups. |
| 267 | For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting. |
| 268 | The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same |
| 269 | highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands |
| 270 | after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file. |
| 271 | |
| 272 | Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string" |
| 273 | can be used for the same group. |
| 274 | |
| 275 | The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name: |
| 276 | NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained |
| 277 | |
| 278 | ============================================================================== |
| 279 | 3. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading* |
| 280 | |
| 281 | This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is |
| 282 | issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are |
| 283 | located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|. |
| 284 | |
| 285 | ":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following: |
| 286 | |
| 287 | Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim |
| 288 | | |
| 289 | +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim |
| 290 | | |
| 291 | +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath' |
| 292 | | | |
| 293 | | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is |
| 294 | | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise |
| 295 | | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules |
| 296 | | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't |
| 297 | | | set yet. |
| 298 | | | |
| 299 | | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when |
| 300 | | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1* |
| 301 | | | |
| 302 | | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable. |
| 303 | | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2* |
| 304 | | |
| 305 | +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any |
| 306 | | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source |
| 307 | | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following. |
| 308 | | | |
| 309 | | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option |
| 310 | | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is |
| 311 | | | made for known file types. *synload-3* |
| 312 | | | |
| 313 | | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile* |
| 314 | | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. |
| 315 | | | *synload-4* |
| 316 | | | |
| 317 | | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file |
| 318 | | | type was detected yet. *synload-5* |
| 319 | | | |
| 320 | | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim| |
| 321 | | |
| 322 | +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file |
| 323 | | type has been detected. *synload-6* |
| 324 | | |
| 325 | +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each |
| 326 | already loaded buffer. |
| 327 | |
| 328 | |
| 329 | Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows: |
| 330 | |
| 331 | Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands. |
| 332 | | |
| 333 | +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3| |
| 334 | | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype' |
| 335 | | option is set to the file type. |
| 336 | | |
| 337 | +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not |
| 338 | | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This |
| 339 | | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following. |
| 340 | | | |
| 341 | | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile* |
| 342 | | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. |
| 343 | | | |
| 344 | | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file, |
| 345 | | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the |
| 346 | | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'. |
| 347 | | |
| 348 | +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this |
| 349 | | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets |
| 350 | | 'syntax' to the determined file type. |
| 351 | | |
| 352 | +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand |
| 353 | | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in |
| 354 | | 'runtimepath', with this command: |
| 355 | | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim |
| 356 | | |
| 357 | +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are |
| 358 | triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific |
| 359 | syntax. |
| 360 | |
| 361 | ============================================================================== |
| 362 | 4. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks* |
| 363 | |
| 364 | *b:current_syntax-variable* |
| 365 | Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the |
| 366 | "b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other |
| 367 | settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: > |
| 368 | :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh" |
| 369 | :au BufReadPost * do-some-things |
| 370 | :au BufReadPost * endif |
| 371 | |
| 372 | |
| 373 | 2HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML* |
| 374 | |
| 375 | This is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current |
| 376 | window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file. |
| 377 | |
| 378 | You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"! |
| 379 | Source the script to convert the current file: > |
| 380 | |
| 381 | :runtime! syntax/2html.vim |
| 382 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 383 | *:TOhtml* |
| 384 | Or use the ":TOhtml" user command. It is defined in a standard plugin. |
| 385 | ":TOhtml" also works with a range and in a Visual area: > |
| 386 | |
| 387 | :10,40TOhtml |
| 388 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 389 | Warning: This is slow! The script must process every character of every line. |
| 390 | Because it is so slow, by default a progress bar is displayed in the |
| 391 | statusline for each step that usually takes a long time. If you don't like |
| 392 | seeing this progress bar, you can disable it and get a very minor speed |
| 393 | improvement with: > |
| 394 | |
| 395 | let g:html_no_progress = 1 |
| 396 | |
Bram Moolenaar | b02cbe3 | 2010-07-11 22:38:52 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 397 | ":TOhtml" has another special feature: if the window is in diff mode, it will |
| 398 | generate HTML that shows all the related windows. This can be disabled by |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 399 | setting the g:html_diff_one_file variable: > |
Bram Moolenaar | b02cbe3 | 2010-07-11 22:38:52 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 400 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 401 | let g:html_diff_one_file = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | b02cbe3 | 2010-07-11 22:38:52 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 402 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 403 | After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The |
| 404 | colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 405 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 406 | To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml| |
| 407 | command, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first and |
| 408 | last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 409 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 410 | :let g:html_start_line = line("'<") |
| 411 | :let g:html_end_line = line("'>") |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 412 | |
| 413 | The lines are numbered according to 'number' option and the Number |
| 414 | highlighting. You can force lines to be numbered in the HTML output by |
| 415 | setting "html_number_lines" to non-zero value: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 416 | :let g:html_number_lines = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 417 | Force to omit the line numbers by using a zero value: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 418 | :let g:html_number_lines = 0 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 419 | Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 420 | :unlet g:html_number_lines |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 421 | |
| 422 | By default, HTML optimized for old browsers is generated. If you prefer using |
| 423 | cascading style sheets (CSS1) for the attributes (resulting in considerably |
| 424 | shorter and valid HTML 4 file), use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 425 | :let g:html_use_css = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 426 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 427 | Closed folds are put in the HTML as they are displayed. If you don't want |
| 428 | this, use the |zR| command before invoking 2html, or use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 429 | :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 430 | |
| 431 | You may want to generate HTML that includes all the data within the folds, and |
| 432 | allow the user to view the folded data similar to how they would in Vim. To |
| 433 | generate this dynamic fold information, use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 434 | :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 435 | |
| 436 | Using html_dynamic_folds will imply html_use_css, because it would be far too |
| 437 | difficult to do it for old browsers. However, html_ignore_folding overrides |
| 438 | html_dynamic_folds. |
| 439 | |
| 440 | Using html_dynamic_folds will default to generating a foldcolumn in the html |
| 441 | similar to Vim's foldcolumn, that will use javascript to open and close the |
| 442 | folds in the HTML document. The width of this foldcolumn starts at the current |
| 443 | setting of |'foldcolumn'| but grows to fit the greatest foldlevel in your |
| 444 | document. If you do not want to show a foldcolumn at all, use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 445 | :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 446 | |
| 447 | Using this option, there will be no foldcolumn available to open the folds in |
| 448 | the HTML. For this reason, another option is provided: html_hover_unfold. |
| 449 | Enabling this option will use CSS 2.0 to allow a user to open a fold by |
| 450 | hovering the mouse pointer over it. Note that old browsers (notably Internet |
| 451 | Explorer 6) will not support this feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is |
| 452 | included to fall back to the normal CSS1 code so that the folds show up |
| 453 | correctly for this browser, but they will not be openable without a |
| 454 | foldcolumn. Note that using html_hover_unfold will allow modern browsers with |
| 455 | disabled javascript to view closed folds. To use this option, use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 456 | :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 457 | |
| 458 | Setting html_no_foldcolumn with html_dynamic_folds will automatically set |
| 459 | html_hover_unfold, because otherwise the folds wouldn't be dynamic. |
| 460 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 461 | By default "<pre>" and "</pre>" is used around the text. This makes it show |
| 462 | up as you see it in Vim, but without wrapping. If you prefer wrapping, at the |
| 463 | risk of making some things look a bit different, use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 464 | :let g:html_no_pre = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 465 | This will use <br> at the end of each line and use " " for repeated |
| 466 | spaces. |
| 467 | |
| 468 | The current value of 'encoding' is used to specify the charset of the HTML |
| 469 | file. This only works for those values of 'encoding' that have an equivalent |
| 470 | HTML charset name. To overrule this set g:html_use_encoding to the name of |
| 471 | the charset to be used: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 472 | :let g:html_use_encoding = "foobar" |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 473 | To omit the line that specifies the charset, set g:html_use_encoding to an |
| 474 | empty string: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 475 | :let g:html_use_encoding = "" |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 476 | To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the g:html_use_encoding |
| 477 | variable: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 478 | :unlet g:html_use_encoding |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 479 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 47136d7 | 2004-10-12 20:02:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 480 | For diff mode a sequence of more than 3 filler lines is displayed as three |
| 481 | lines with the middle line mentioning the total number of inserted lines. If |
| 482 | you prefer to see all the inserted lines use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 483 | :let g:html_whole_filler = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 47136d7 | 2004-10-12 20:02:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 484 | And to go back to displaying up to three lines again: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 485 | :unlet g:html_whole_filler |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 486 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 487 | *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* |
| 488 | An alternative is to have the script generate XHTML (XML compliant HTML). To |
| 489 | do this set the "use_xhtml" variable: > |
| 490 | :let use_xhtml = 1 |
| 491 | To disable it again delete the variable: > |
| 492 | :unlet use_xhtml |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 493 | |
| 494 | Remarks: |
| 495 | - This only works in a version with GUI support. If the GUI is not actually |
| 496 | running (possible for X11) it still works, but not very well (the colors |
| 497 | may be wrong). |
| 498 | - Older browsers will not show the background colors. |
| 499 | - From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)! |
| 500 | |
| 501 | Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a |
| 502 | Unix shell: > |
| 503 | for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done |
| 504 | < |
| 505 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 506 | ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 507 | |
| 508 | ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign |
| 509 | any value to the respective variable. Example: > |
| 510 | :let abel_obsolete_ok=1 |
| 511 | To disable them use ":unlet". Example: > |
| 512 | :unlet abel_obsolete_ok |
| 513 | |
| 514 | Variable Highlight ~ |
| 515 | abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors |
| 516 | abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader |
| 517 | |
| 518 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 519 | ADA |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 520 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 521 | See |ft-ada-syntax| |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 522 | |
| 523 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 524 | ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 525 | |
| 526 | The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 527 | by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 528 | by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 529 | and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 530 | |
| 531 | :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim') |
| 532 | |
| 533 | will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code > |
| 534 | |
| 535 | <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[ |
| 536 | # everything inside is highlighted as perl |
| 537 | ]]></script> |
| 538 | |
| 539 | See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently. |
| 540 | |
| 541 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 542 | APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 543 | |
| 544 | The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting depending on Apache HTTP |
| 545 | server version, by default for 1.3.x. Set "apache_version" to Apache version |
| 546 | (as a string) to get highlighting for another version. Example: > |
| 547 | |
| 548 | :let apache_version = "2.0" |
| 549 | < |
| 550 | |
| 551 | *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k* |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 552 | ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax* |
| 553 | *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 554 | |
| 555 | Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection |
| 556 | doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your |
| 557 | startup vimrc: > |
| 558 | :let filetype_i = "asm" |
| 559 | Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use. |
| 560 | |
| 561 | There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name |
| 562 | extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a |
| 563 | line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax |
| 564 | files are included: |
| 565 | asm GNU assembly (the default) |
| 566 | asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly |
| 567 | asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly |
| 568 | ia64 Intel Itanium 64 |
| 569 | fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net) |
| 570 | masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86) |
| 571 | nasm Netwide assembly |
| 572 | tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and |
| 573 | MMX) |
| 574 | pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84) |
| 575 | |
| 576 | The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 577 | asmsyntax=nasm |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 578 | Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 579 | one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be |
| 580 | immediately before or after this text. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 581 | |
| 582 | The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the |
| 583 | b:asmsyntax variable: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 584 | :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm" |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 585 | |
| 586 | If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of |
| 587 | the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly |
| 588 | language: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 589 | :let asmsyntax = "nasm" |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 590 | |
| 591 | As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used. |
| 592 | |
| 593 | |
| 594 | Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~ |
| 595 | |
| 596 | To enable a feature: > |
| 597 | :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm |
| 598 | To disable a feature: > |
| 599 | :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm |
| 600 | |
| 601 | Variable Highlight ~ |
| 602 | nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error |
| 603 | (parser dependent; not recommended) |
| 604 | nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error |
| 605 | nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo |
| 606 | |
| 607 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 608 | ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 609 | |
| 610 | *.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's |
| 611 | hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are |
| 612 | using. For Perl script use: > |
| 613 | :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl" |
| 614 | :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl" |
| 615 | For Visual Basic use: > |
| 616 | :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs" |
| 617 | :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs" |
| 618 | |
| 619 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 620 | BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | f193fff | 2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 621 | |
| 622 | The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV upto SSA ERP LN |
| 623 | for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants |
| 624 | are supported. |
| 625 | |
| 626 | Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify |
| 627 | in ones |.vimrc|: > |
| 628 | let baan_code_stds=1 |
| 629 | |
| 630 | *baan-folding* |
| 631 | |
| 632 | Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables |
| 633 | mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on |
| 634 | source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive. |
| 635 | |
| 636 | To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: > |
| 637 | let baan_fold=1 |
| 638 | Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The |
| 639 | indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not |
| 640 | considered equal to a tab). > |
| 641 | let baan_fold_block=1 |
| 642 | Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO, |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 643 | SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to |
Bram Moolenaar | f193fff | 2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 644 | match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). > |
| 645 | let baan_fold_sql=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 646 | Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set| |
Bram Moolenaar | f193fff | 2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 647 | the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in |
| 648 | .../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: > |
| 649 | set foldminlines=5 |
| 650 | set foldnestmax=6 |
| 651 | |
| 652 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 653 | BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 654 | |
| 655 | Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect |
| 656 | which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first |
| 657 | five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic", |
| 658 | otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual |
| 659 | Basic. |
| 660 | |
| 661 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 662 | C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 663 | |
| 664 | A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value |
| 665 | to the respective variable. Example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 666 | :let c_comment_strings = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 667 | To disable them use ":unlet". Example: > |
| 668 | :unlet c_comment_strings |
| 669 | |
| 670 | Variable Highlight ~ |
| 671 | c_gnu GNU gcc specific items |
| 672 | c_comment_strings strings and numbers inside a comment |
| 673 | c_space_errors trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab> |
| 674 | c_no_trail_space_error ... but no trailing spaces |
| 675 | c_no_tab_space_error ... but no spaces before a <Tab> |
| 676 | c_no_bracket_error don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors |
Bram Moolenaar | 677ee68 | 2005-01-27 14:41:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 677 | c_no_curly_error don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors; |
| 678 | except { and } in first column |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 679 | c_curly_error highlight a missing }; this forces syncing from the |
| 680 | start of the file, can be slow |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 681 | c_no_ansi don't do standard ANSI types and constants |
| 682 | c_ansi_typedefs ... but do standard ANSI types |
| 683 | c_ansi_constants ... but do standard ANSI constants |
| 684 | c_no_utf don't highlight \u and \U in strings |
| 685 | c_syntax_for_h use C syntax for *.h files, instead of C++ |
| 686 | c_no_if0 don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments |
| 687 | c_no_cformat don't highlight %-formats in strings |
| 688 | c_no_c99 don't highlight C99 standard items |
| 689 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 293ee4d | 2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 690 | When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will |
| 691 | become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: > |
| 692 | :let c_no_comment_fold = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | f9393ef | 2006-04-24 19:47:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 693 | "#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: > |
| 694 | :let c_no_if0_fold = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 293ee4d | 2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 695 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 696 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed |
| 697 | when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable |
| 698 | to a larger number: > |
| 699 | :let c_minlines = 100 |
| 700 | This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first |
| 701 | displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The |
| 702 | disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow. |
| 703 | |
| 704 | When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only |
| 705 | works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If |
| 706 | you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly. |
| 707 | |
| 708 | To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster. |
| 709 | Example: > |
| 710 | :au Syntax c call MyCadd() |
| 711 | :function MyCadd() |
| 712 | : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni |
| 713 | : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem |
| 714 | : hi link cMyItem Title |
| 715 | :endfun |
| 716 | |
| 717 | ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes |
| 718 | "NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is |
| 719 | not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant |
| 720 | highlighting: > |
| 721 | :hi link cConstant NONE |
| 722 | |
| 723 | If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the |
| 724 | highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket. |
| 725 | |
| 726 | If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file |
Bram Moolenaar | 06b5d51 | 2010-05-22 15:37:44 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 727 | in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 728 | ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 729 | syn sync fromstart |
| 730 | set foldmethod=syntax |
| 731 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 732 | CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 733 | |
| 734 | C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon |
| 735 | the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C. |
| 736 | |
| 737 | By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead |
| 738 | of C or C++: > |
| 739 | :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1 |
| 740 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 741 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 742 | CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 743 | |
| 744 | Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings |
| 745 | that are available. Additionally there is: |
| 746 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 747 | chill_space_errors like c_space_errors |
| 748 | chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings |
| 749 | chill_minlines like c_minlines |
| 750 | |
| 751 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 752 | CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 753 | |
| 754 | ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line. |
| 755 | If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: > |
| 756 | let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0 |
| 757 | This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use |
| 758 | "b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax |
| 759 | file). |
| 760 | |
| 761 | You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: > |
| 762 | :hi link ChangelogError Error |
| 763 | Or to avoid the highlighting: > |
| 764 | :hi link ChangelogError NONE |
| 765 | This works immediately. |
| 766 | |
| 767 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 768 | COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 769 | |
| 770 | COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh |
| 771 | development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance |
| 772 | versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting, |
| 773 | add this line to your .vimrc: > |
| 774 | :let cobol_legacy_code = 1 |
| 775 | To disable it again, use this: > |
| 776 | :unlet cobol_legacy_code |
| 777 | |
| 778 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 779 | COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 780 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 781 | The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 782 | comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 783 | |
| 784 | :let html_wrong_comments = 1 |
| 785 | |
| 786 | The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file. |
| 787 | |
| 788 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 789 | CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 790 | |
| 791 | This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually |
| 792 | used. |
| 793 | |
| 794 | Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems |
| 795 | symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish |
| 796 | between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the |
| 797 | "filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: > |
| 798 | |
| 799 | :let filetype_csh = "csh" |
| 800 | |
| 801 | For using tcsh: > |
| 802 | |
| 803 | :let filetype_csh = "tcsh" |
| 804 | |
| 805 | Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc, |
| 806 | tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 807 | will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 808 | "filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the |
| 809 | variable. |
| 810 | |
| 811 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 812 | CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 813 | |
| 814 | Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 815 | hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 816 | or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 817 | normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 818 | line to your .vimrc file: > |
| 819 | |
| 820 | :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1 |
| 821 | |
| 822 | Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) > |
| 823 | |
| 824 | :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1 |
| 825 | |
| 826 | To disable these again, use this: > |
| 827 | |
| 828 | :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc |
| 829 | :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp |
| 830 | < |
| 831 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 832 | CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 833 | |
| 834 | Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection |
| 835 | doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your |
| 836 | startup vimrc: > |
| 837 | :let filetype_w = "cweb" |
| 838 | |
| 839 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 840 | DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 841 | |
| 842 | Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files |
Bram Moolenaar | a17d4c1 | 2010-05-30 18:30:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 843 | according to freedesktop.org standard: |
| 844 | http://standards.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/ |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 845 | But actually almost none implements this standard fully. Thus it will |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 846 | highlight all Unix ini files. But you can force strict highlighting according |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 847 | to standard by placing this in your vimrc file: > |
| 848 | :let enforce_freedesktop_standard = 1 |
| 849 | |
| 850 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 851 | DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 852 | |
| 853 | The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to |
| 854 | provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of |
| 855 | the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most |
| 856 | versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and |
| 857 | uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following |
| 858 | line to your startup file: > |
| 859 | let dircolors_is_slackware = 1 |
| 860 | |
| 861 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 862 | DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook* |
| 863 | DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax* |
| 864 | DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 865 | |
| 866 | There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you |
| 867 | are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you |
| 868 | automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type |
| 869 | defaults to XML. |
| 870 | You can set the type manually: > |
| 871 | :let docbk_type = "sgml" |
| 872 | or: > |
| 873 | :let docbk_type = "xml" |
| 874 | You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated. |
| 875 | Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": > |
| 876 | :set filetype=docbksgml |
| 877 | or: > |
| 878 | :set filetype=docbkxml |
| 879 | |
| 880 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 881 | DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 882 | |
| 883 | There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new |
| 884 | extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and |
| 885 | is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT |
| 886 | this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2. |
| 887 | Select the version you want with the following line: > |
| 888 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8299df9 | 2004-07-10 09:47:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 889 | :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 890 | |
| 891 | If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support |
| 892 | Windows 2000. |
| 893 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8299df9 | 2004-07-10 09:47:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 894 | A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 895 | "dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter |
| 896 | is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8299df9 | 2004-07-10 09:47:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 897 | |
| 898 | :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1 |
| 899 | |
| 900 | If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected. |
| 901 | |
| 902 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 903 | DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax* |
| 904 | |
| 905 | Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format |
Bram Moolenaar | e37d50a | 2008-08-06 17:06:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 906 | (similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp, |
| 907 | idl and php files, and should also work with java. |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 908 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 909 | There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done |
| 910 | explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file. |
| 911 | Example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 912 | :set syntax=c.doxygen |
| 913 | or > |
| 914 | // vim:syntax=c.doxygen |
| 915 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 916 | It can also be done automatically for c, cpp and idl files by setting the |
| 917 | global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by adding |
| 918 | the following to your .vimrc. > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 919 | :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1 |
| 920 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 06b5d51 | 2010-05-22 15:37:44 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 921 | There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 922 | are to do with non-standard highlighting options. |
| 923 | |
| 924 | Variable Default Effect ~ |
| 925 | g:doxygen_enhanced_color |
| 926 | g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for |
| 927 | doxygen comments. |
| 928 | |
| 929 | doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic |
| 930 | and html_my_rendering underline. |
| 931 | |
| 932 | doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief |
| 933 | colour highlighting. |
| 934 | |
| 935 | doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 936 | punctuation of brief |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 937 | |
| 938 | There are also some hilight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in |
| 939 | configuration. |
| 940 | |
| 941 | Highlight Effect ~ |
| 942 | doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing |
| 943 | punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section |
| 944 | doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the |
| 945 | \endlink from a \link section. |
| 946 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 947 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 948 | DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 949 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 950 | The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 951 | case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 952 | |
| 953 | :let dtd_ignore_case=1 |
| 954 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 955 | The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 956 | this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: > |
| 957 | |
| 958 | :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1 |
| 959 | |
| 960 | before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file. |
| 961 | Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the |
| 962 | 'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'. |
| 963 | Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant' |
| 964 | highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 965 | delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 966 | |
| 967 | :let dtd_no_param_entities=1 |
| 968 | |
| 969 | The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's. |
| 970 | |
| 971 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 972 | EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 973 | |
| 974 | While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 975 | syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to |
| 976 | highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 977 | highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 978 | |
| 979 | :let eiffel_ignore_case=1 |
| 980 | |
| 981 | Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments. |
| 982 | |
| 983 | Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: > |
| 984 | |
| 985 | :let eiffel_strict=1 |
| 986 | :let eiffel_pedantic=1 |
| 987 | |
| 988 | Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the |
| 989 | five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and |
| 990 | "NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names. |
| 991 | |
| 992 | Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style |
| 993 | guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and |
| 994 | lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords). |
| 995 | |
| 996 | If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void", |
| 997 | "Result", and "Precursor", you can use > |
| 998 | |
| 999 | :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1 |
| 1000 | |
| 1001 | instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off. |
| 1002 | |
| 1003 | Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already |
| 1004 | experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: > |
| 1005 | |
| 1006 | :let eiffel_ise=1 |
| 1007 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1008 | Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1009 | |
| 1010 | :let eiffel_hex_constants=1 |
| 1011 | |
| 1012 | to your startup file. |
| 1013 | |
| 1014 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1015 | ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1016 | |
| 1017 | The erlang highlighting supports Erlang (ERicsson LANGuage). |
| 1018 | Erlang is case sensitive and default extension is ".erl". |
| 1019 | |
| 1020 | If you want to disable keywords highlighting, put in your .vimrc: > |
| 1021 | :let erlang_keywords = 1 |
| 1022 | If you want to disable built-in-functions highlighting, put in your |
| 1023 | .vimrc file: > |
| 1024 | :let erlang_functions = 1 |
| 1025 | If you want to disable special characters highlighting, put in |
| 1026 | your .vimrc: > |
| 1027 | :let erlang_characters = 1 |
| 1028 | |
| 1029 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d68071d | 2006-05-02 22:08:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1030 | FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax* |
| 1031 | |
| 1032 | FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com |
| 1033 | |
| 1034 | Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki |
| 1035 | syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make |
| 1036 | editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the |
| 1037 | start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length), |
| 1038 | 'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak' |
| 1039 | (to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen), |
| 1040 | and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default. |
| 1041 | |
| 1042 | If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys |
| 1043 | move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: > |
| 1044 | :let flexwiki_maps = 1 |
| 1045 | |
| 1046 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1047 | FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1048 | |
| 1049 | The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default |
| 1050 | modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String, |
Bram Moolenaar | dd2a0d8 | 2007-05-12 15:07:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1051 | following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1052 | J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991. |
| 1053 | |
| 1054 | If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to |
| 1055 | redefine the following syntax groups: |
| 1056 | |
| 1057 | - formConditional |
| 1058 | - formNumber |
| 1059 | - formStatement |
| 1060 | - formHeaderStatement |
| 1061 | - formComment |
| 1062 | - formPreProc |
| 1063 | - formDirective |
| 1064 | - formType |
| 1065 | - formString |
| 1066 | |
| 1067 | Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and |
| 1068 | directives per default in the same syntax group. |
| 1069 | |
| 1070 | A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1071 | header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1072 | this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file > |
| 1073 | |
| 1074 | :let form_enhanced_color=1 |
| 1075 | |
| 1076 | The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1077 | gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1078 | conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction. |
| 1079 | |
| 1080 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1081 | FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1082 | |
| 1083 | Default highlighting and dialect ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1084 | Highlighting appropriate for f95 (Fortran 95) is used by default. This choice |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1085 | should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 95 is a |
Bram Moolenaar | e06c188 | 2010-07-21 22:05:20 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 1086 | superset of Fortran 90 and almost a superset of Fortran 77. Preliminary |
| 1087 | support for Fortran 2003 and Fortran 2008 features has been introduced and is |
| 1088 | automatically available in the default (f95) highlighting. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1089 | |
| 1090 | Fortran source code form ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1091 | Fortran 9x code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1092 | syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set. |
| 1093 | |
| 1094 | When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1095 | form. If you always use free source form, then > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1096 | :let fortran_free_source=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1097 | in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1098 | form, then > |
| 1099 | :let fortran_fixed_source=1 |
| 1100 | in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. |
| 1101 | |
| 1102 | If the form of the source code depends upon the file extension, then it is |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1103 | most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin file. For more |
| 1104 | information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1105 | fortran files with an .f90 extension are written in free source form and the |
| 1106 | rest in fixed source form, add the following code to your ftplugin file > |
| 1107 | let s:extfname = expand("%:e") |
| 1108 | if s:extfname ==? "f90" |
| 1109 | let fortran_free_source=1 |
| 1110 | unlet! fortran_fixed_source |
| 1111 | else |
| 1112 | let fortran_fixed_source=1 |
| 1113 | unlet! fortran_free_source |
| 1114 | endif |
| 1115 | Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command |
| 1116 | precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file. |
| 1117 | |
| 1118 | When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free |
| 1119 | source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1120 | fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1121 | neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to |
| 1122 | determine which source form has been used by examining the first five columns |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1123 | of the first 250 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form are |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1124 | detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The algorithm |
| 1125 | should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a file that |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1126 | begins with 250 or more full-line comments, the script may incorrectly decide |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1127 | that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens, just add a |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1128 | non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns of the |
| 1129 | first twenty five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file. |
| 1130 | |
| 1131 | Tabs in fortran files ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1132 | Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1133 | fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries. |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1134 | Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like |
| 1135 | using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1136 | variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as > |
| 1137 | :let fortran_have_tabs=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1138 | placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1139 | mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins. |
| 1140 | |
| 1141 | Syntax folding of fortran files ~ |
| 1142 | If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable |
| 1143 | fortran_fold with a command such as > |
| 1144 | :let fortran_fold=1 |
| 1145 | to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that |
| 1146 | is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1147 | subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1148 | also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as > |
| 1149 | :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1 |
| 1150 | then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1151 | case constructs. If you also set the variable |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1152 | fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as > |
| 1153 | :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1 |
| 1154 | then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1155 | lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1156 | |
| 1157 | If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or |
| 1158 | fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1159 | you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1160 | units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program |
| 1161 | unit. |
| 1162 | |
| 1163 | More precise fortran syntax ~ |
| 1164 | If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as > |
| 1165 | :let fortran_more_precise=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1166 | then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular, |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1167 | statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be |
| 1168 | recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall |
| 1169 | construct. |
| 1170 | |
| 1171 | Non-default fortran dialects ~ |
| 1172 | The syntax script supports five Fortran dialects: f95, f90, f77, the Lahey |
| 1173 | subset elf90, and the Imagine1 subset F. |
| 1174 | |
| 1175 | If you use f77 with extensions, even common ones like do/enddo loops, do/while |
| 1176 | loops and free source form that are supported by most f77 compilers including |
| 1177 | g77 (GNU Fortran), then you will probably find the default highlighting |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1178 | satisfactory. However, if you use strict f77 with no extensions, not even free |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1179 | source form or the MIL STD 1753 extensions, then the advantages of setting the |
| 1180 | dialect to f77 are that names such as SUM are recognized as user variable |
| 1181 | names and not highlighted as f9x intrinsic functions, that obsolete constructs |
| 1182 | such as ASSIGN statements are not highlighted as todo items, and that fixed |
| 1183 | source form will be assumed. |
| 1184 | |
| 1185 | If you use elf90 or F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is |
| 1186 | that f90 features excluded from these dialects will be highlighted as todo |
| 1187 | items and that free source form will be assumed as required for these |
| 1188 | dialects. |
| 1189 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1190 | The dialect can be selected by setting the variable fortran_dialect. The |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1191 | permissible values of fortran_dialect are case-sensitive and must be "f95", |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1192 | "f90", "f77", "elf" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are ignored. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1193 | |
| 1194 | If all your fortran files use the same dialect, set fortran_dialect in your |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1195 | .vimrc prior to your syntax on statement. If the dialect depends upon the file |
| 1196 | extension, then it is most convenient to set it in a ftplugin file. For more |
| 1197 | information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1198 | fortran files with an .f90 extension are written in the elf subset, your |
| 1199 | ftplugin file should contain the code > |
| 1200 | let s:extfname = expand("%:e") |
| 1201 | if s:extfname ==? "f90" |
| 1202 | let fortran_dialect="elf" |
| 1203 | else |
| 1204 | unlet! fortran_dialect |
| 1205 | endif |
| 1206 | Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command |
| 1207 | precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file. |
| 1208 | |
| 1209 | Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1210 | the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis, by |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1211 | including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=f77 or |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1212 | elf or F or f90 or f95) in one of the first three lines in your file. For |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1213 | example, your older .f files may be written in extended f77 but your newer |
| 1214 | ones may be F codes, and you would identify the latter by including in the |
| 1215 | first three lines of those files a Fortran comment of the form > |
| 1216 | ! fortran_dialect=F |
| 1217 | F overrides elf if both directives are present. |
| 1218 | |
| 1219 | Limitations ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1220 | Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith |
| 1221 | strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1222 | because Fortran90 has no reserved words. |
| 1223 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1224 | For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and |
| 1225 | |ft-fortran-plugin|. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1226 | |
| 1227 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1228 | FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1229 | |
| 1230 | In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match |
| 1231 | the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns |
| 1232 | appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these |
| 1233 | patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version |
| 1234 | number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm. |
| 1235 | |
| 1236 | For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/ |
| 1237 | as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: > |
| 1238 | |
| 1239 | :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 | |
| 1240 | \ set filetype=fvwm |
| 1241 | |
| 1242 | If you'd like Vim to highlight all valid color names, tell it where to |
| 1243 | find the color database (rgb.txt) on your system. Do this by setting |
| 1244 | "rgb_file" to its location. Assuming your color database is located |
| 1245 | in /usr/X11/lib/X11/, you should add the line > |
| 1246 | |
| 1247 | :let rgb_file = "/usr/X11/lib/X11/rgb.txt" |
| 1248 | |
| 1249 | to your .vimrc file. |
| 1250 | |
| 1251 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1252 | GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1253 | |
| 1254 | The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and |
| 1255 | the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks) |
| 1256 | is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim| |
| 1257 | are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code: |
| 1258 | |
| 1259 | htmlString |
| 1260 | htmlValue |
| 1261 | htmlEndTag |
| 1262 | htmlTag |
| 1263 | htmlTagN |
| 1264 | |
| 1265 | Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline |
| 1266 | java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML |
| 1267 | group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight |
| 1268 | correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava |
| 1269 | to the contains clause. |
| 1270 | |
| 1271 | The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError |
| 1272 | group to make them easier to see. |
| 1273 | |
| 1274 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1275 | GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1276 | |
| 1277 | The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1278 | under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1279 | of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the |
| 1280 | filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file |
| 1281 | (see |filetype.txt|). |
| 1282 | |
| 1283 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1284 | HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1285 | |
| 1286 | The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1287 | Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1288 | syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives. |
| 1289 | |
| 1290 | If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a |
| 1291 | light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: > |
| 1292 | :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1 |
| 1293 | To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers, |
| 1294 | add: > |
| 1295 | :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1 |
| 1296 | To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: > |
| 1297 | :let hs_highlight_types = 1 |
| 1298 | And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: > |
| 1299 | :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1 |
| 1300 | If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in |
| 1301 | your .vimrc: > |
| 1302 | :let hs_highlight_debug = 1 |
| 1303 | |
| 1304 | The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor |
| 1305 | directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1306 | directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for |
| 1307 | operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1308 | as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: > |
| 1309 | :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1 |
| 1310 | |
| 1311 | The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to |
| 1312 | automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains |
| 1313 | TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1314 | or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1315 | in your .vimrc > |
| 1316 | :let lhs_markup = none |
| 1317 | for no highlighting at all, or > |
| 1318 | :let lhs_markup = tex |
| 1319 | to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup. |
| 1320 | For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of |
| 1321 | this variable, so e.g. > |
| 1322 | :let b:lhs_markup = tex |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1323 | will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1324 | set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or |
| 1325 | loading a file. |
| 1326 | |
| 1327 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1328 | HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1329 | |
| 1330 | The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows. |
| 1331 | |
| 1332 | The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag. |
| 1333 | This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for |
| 1334 | closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are |
| 1335 | defined for you) |
| 1336 | |
| 1337 | Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag |
| 1338 | names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which |
| 1339 | makes it easy to spot errors |
| 1340 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1341 | Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1342 | names are colored differently than unknown ones. |
| 1343 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1344 | Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1345 | are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal |
| 1346 | text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>, |
| 1347 | while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1348 | only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1349 | <A href="somefile.html">). |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1350 | |
| 1351 | If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the |
| 1352 | following syntax groups: |
| 1353 | |
| 1354 | - htmlBold |
| 1355 | - htmlBoldUnderline |
| 1356 | - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic |
| 1357 | - htmlUnderline |
| 1358 | - htmlUnderlineItalic |
| 1359 | - htmlItalic |
| 1360 | - htmlTitle for titles |
| 1361 | - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings |
| 1362 | |
| 1363 | To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception |
| 1364 | of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the |
| 1365 | following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files |
| 1366 | are read during initialization) > |
| 1367 | :let html_my_rendering=1 |
| 1368 | |
| 1369 | If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at |
| 1370 | http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html |
| 1371 | |
| 1372 | You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your |
| 1373 | vimrc file: > |
| 1374 | :let html_no_rendering=1 |
| 1375 | |
| 1376 | HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the |
| 1377 | details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors. |
| 1378 | However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and |
| 1379 | ends with --!>) you can define > |
| 1380 | :let html_wrong_comments=1 |
| 1381 | |
| 1382 | JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as |
| 1383 | 'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1384 | programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1385 | supported, no other scripting language has been added yet. |
| 1386 | |
| 1387 | Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too. |
| 1388 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1389 | There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been |
| 1390 | written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1391 | following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language |
| 1392 | (the example comes from the asp.vim file): |
| 1393 | |
| 1394 | runtime! syntax/html.vim |
| 1395 | syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp |
| 1396 | |
| 1397 | Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain |
| 1398 | the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc. |
| 1399 | |
| 1400 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1401 | HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1402 | |
| 1403 | The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows: |
| 1404 | |
| 1405 | Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM |
| 1406 | doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change |
| 1407 | this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a |
| 1408 | different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: > |
| 1409 | :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray |
| 1410 | |
| 1411 | Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose. |
| 1412 | |
| 1413 | Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to |
| 1414 | signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening |
| 1415 | a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: > |
| 1416 | :set syntax=htmlos |
| 1417 | |
| 1418 | Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a |
| 1419 | block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively. |
| 1420 | |
| 1421 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1422 | IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1423 | |
| 1424 | Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for |
| 1425 | how to recognize this filetype. |
| 1426 | |
| 1427 | To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: > |
| 1428 | :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64" |
| 1429 | |
| 1430 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1431 | INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1432 | |
| 1433 | Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as |
| 1434 | most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols |
| 1435 | to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: > |
| 1436 | :let inform_highlight_simple=1 |
| 1437 | |
| 1438 | By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted, |
| 1439 | and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If |
| 1440 | you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you |
| 1441 | need to add this to your startup sequence: > |
| 1442 | :let inform_highlight_glulx=1 |
| 1443 | |
| 1444 | This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the |
| 1445 | set of highlighted system functions. |
| 1446 | |
| 1447 | The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when |
| 1448 | it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors |
| 1449 | by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your |
| 1450 | startup sequence: > |
| 1451 | :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1 |
| 1452 | |
| 1453 | By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler |
| 1454 | version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older |
| 1455 | Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your |
| 1456 | startup sequence: > |
| 1457 | :let inform_highlight_old=1 |
| 1458 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 9e54a0e | 2006-04-14 20:42:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1459 | IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax* |
| 1460 | |
| 1461 | IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In |
| 1462 | Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls. |
| 1463 | |
| 1464 | IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to |
| 1465 | rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1466 | repetitive but seems to work. |
Bram Moolenaar | 9e54a0e | 2006-04-14 20:42:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1467 | |
| 1468 | There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them |
| 1469 | are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions. |
| 1470 | |
| 1471 | The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions. |
| 1472 | |
| 1473 | Variable Effect ~ |
| 1474 | |
| 1475 | idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific |
| 1476 | extensions |
| 1477 | idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions |
| 1478 | idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but |
| 1479 | quite helpful) |
| 1480 | idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors |
| 1481 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1482 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1483 | JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1484 | |
| 1485 | The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options: |
| 1486 | |
| 1487 | In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was |
| 1488 | flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1489 | classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1490 | way, put the following line into your vim startup file: > |
| 1491 | :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1 |
| 1492 | |
| 1493 | All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To |
| 1494 | highlight them use: > |
| 1495 | :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1 |
| 1496 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1497 | You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1498 | download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html. |
| 1499 | If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io |
| 1500 | use the following: > |
| 1501 | :let java_highlight_java_io=1 |
| 1502 | Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported. |
| 1503 | |
| 1504 | Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1505 | how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1506 | functions: |
| 1507 | |
| 1508 | If you write function declarations that are always indented by either |
| 1509 | a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set > |
| 1510 | :let java_highlight_functions="indent" |
| 1511 | However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are |
| 1512 | supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use > |
| 1513 | :let java_highlight_functions="style" |
| 1514 | If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function |
| 1515 | declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the |
| 1516 | definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the |
| 1517 | original one and then adds the code to highlight functions. |
| 1518 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1519 | In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should |
Bram Moolenaar | ed20346 | 2004-06-16 11:19:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1520 | only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1521 | statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1522 | your startup file: > |
| 1523 | :let java_highlight_debug=1 |
| 1524 | The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special' |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1525 | characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1526 | new highlightings for the following groups.: |
| 1527 | Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType |
| 1528 | which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1529 | strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1530 | have opted to chose another background for those statements. |
| 1531 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1532 | In order to help you write code that can be easily ported between Java and |
| 1533 | C++, all C++ keywords can be marked as an error in a Java program. To |
| 1534 | have this add this line in your .vimrc file: > |
| 1535 | :let java_allow_cpp_keywords = 0 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1536 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1537 | Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and |
| 1538 | creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code |
| 1539 | similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript |
| 1540 | and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however: |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1541 | 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by |
| 1542 | some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change |
| 1543 | the color change the group CommentTitle). |
| 1544 | 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'. |
| 1545 | 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special' |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1546 | 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1547 | and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function. |
| 1548 | To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 1549 | :let java_ignore_javadoc=1 |
| 1550 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1551 | If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you |
| 1552 | can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic |
| 1553 | scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you |
| 1554 | actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded |
| 1555 | CSS. The options to use are > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1556 | :let java_javascript=1 |
| 1557 | :let java_css=1 |
| 1558 | :let java_vb=1 |
| 1559 | |
| 1560 | In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors |
| 1561 | for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with > |
| 1562 | :hi link javaParen Comment |
| 1563 | or > |
| 1564 | :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff |
| 1565 | |
| 1566 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed |
| 1567 | when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable |
| 1568 | to a larger number: > |
| 1569 | :let java_minlines = 50 |
| 1570 | This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first |
| 1571 | displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger |
| 1572 | number is that redrawing can become slow. |
| 1573 | |
| 1574 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1575 | LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1576 | |
| 1577 | Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the |
| 1578 | style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just |
| 1579 | define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: > |
| 1580 | :let lace_case_insensitive=1 |
| 1581 | |
| 1582 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1583 | LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1584 | |
| 1585 | Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter |
| 1586 | gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for > |
| 1587 | :syn sync minlines=300 |
| 1588 | may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization |
| 1589 | difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files). |
| 1590 | |
| 1591 | |
Bram Moolenaar | a5fac54 | 2005-10-12 20:58:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1592 | LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax* |
| 1593 | |
| 1594 | The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: > |
| 1595 | |
| 1596 | g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted |
| 1597 | as if the contents of the string were lisp. |
| 1598 | Useful for AutoLisp. |
| 1599 | g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels |
| 1600 | of parenthesization will receive different |
| 1601 | highlighting. |
| 1602 | < |
| 1603 | The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for |
| 1604 | the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of |
| 1605 | colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode |
| 1606 | specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the |
| 1607 | usual colorscheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual |
| 1608 | highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|). |
| 1609 | |
| 1610 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1611 | LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1612 | |
| 1613 | There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting. |
| 1614 | |
| 1615 | If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > |
| 1616 | |
| 1617 | :let lite_sql_query = 1 |
| 1618 | |
| 1619 | For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can |
| 1620 | set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > |
| 1621 | |
| 1622 | :let lite_minlines = 200 |
| 1623 | |
| 1624 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1625 | LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1626 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1627 | LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensj| C. The |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1628 | file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother |
| 1629 | users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you |
| 1630 | should set a variable in your .vimrc file: > |
| 1631 | |
| 1632 | :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1 |
| 1633 | |
| 1634 | If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a |
| 1635 | modeline. For a LPC file: |
| 1636 | |
| 1637 | // vim:set ft=lpc: |
| 1638 | |
| 1639 | For a C file that is recognized as LPC: |
| 1640 | |
| 1641 | // vim:set ft=c: |
| 1642 | |
| 1643 | If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file. |
| 1644 | |
| 1645 | There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1646 | used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1647 | and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also |
| 1648 | asserts the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when |
| 1649 | you are using the latest version of MudOS: > |
| 1650 | |
| 1651 | :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1 |
| 1652 | |
| 1653 | For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: > |
| 1654 | |
| 1655 | :let lpc_compat_32 = 1 |
| 1656 | |
| 1657 | For LPC4 series of LPC: > |
| 1658 | |
| 1659 | :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1 |
| 1660 | |
| 1661 | For uLPC series of LPC: |
| 1662 | uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax |
| 1663 | instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike |
| 1664 | |
| 1665 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1666 | LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1667 | |
Bram Moolenaar | fc1421e | 2006-04-20 22:17:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1668 | This syntax file may be used for Lua 4.0, Lua 5.0 or Lua 5.1 (the latter is |
| 1669 | the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables |
| 1670 | lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua |
| 1671 | 4.0 syntax highlighting, use this command: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1672 | |
| 1673 | :let lua_version = 4 |
| 1674 | |
Bram Moolenaar | fc1421e | 2006-04-20 22:17:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1675 | If you are using Lua 5.0, use these commands: > |
| 1676 | |
| 1677 | :let lua_version = 5 |
| 1678 | :let lua_subversion = 0 |
| 1679 | |
| 1680 | To restore highlighting for Lua 5.1: > |
| 1681 | |
| 1682 | :let lua_version = 5 |
| 1683 | :let lua_subversion = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1684 | |
| 1685 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1686 | MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1687 | |
| 1688 | Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures, |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1689 | quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions, |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1690 | signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by |
| 1691 | whitespaces and end with a newline. |
| 1692 | |
| 1693 | Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>' |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1694 | as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1695 | only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space). |
| 1696 | |
| 1697 | By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1698 | displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1699 | with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: > |
| 1700 | |
| 1701 | :let mail_minlines = 30 |
| 1702 | |
| 1703 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1704 | MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1705 | |
| 1706 | In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot |
| 1707 | errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this |
| 1708 | feature off by using: > |
| 1709 | |
| 1710 | :let make_no_commands = 1 |
| 1711 | |
| 1712 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1713 | MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1714 | |
| 1715 | Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language |
| 1716 | supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user. |
| 1717 | The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be |
| 1718 | highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: > |
| 1719 | |
| 1720 | :let mvpkg_all= 1 |
| 1721 | |
| 1722 | to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by |
| 1723 | choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to |
| 1724 | 1, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing |
| 1725 | $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim). |
| 1726 | |
| 1727 | Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors > |
| 1728 | mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process |
| 1729 | mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex |
| 1730 | mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats |
| 1731 | mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student |
| 1732 | mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools |
| 1733 | mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor |
| 1734 | mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder |
| 1735 | mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries |
| 1736 | |
| 1737 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1738 | MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 34cdc3e | 2005-05-18 22:24:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1739 | |
| 1740 | Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you |
| 1741 | have the following in your .vimrc: > |
| 1742 | |
| 1743 | let filetype_m = "mma" |
| 1744 | |
| 1745 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1746 | MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1747 | |
| 1748 | If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your |
| 1749 | highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style |
| 1750 | comments: > |
| 1751 | |
| 1752 | :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1 |
| 1753 | |
| 1754 | To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: > |
| 1755 | |
| 1756 | :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1 |
| 1757 | |
| 1758 | To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching |
| 1759 | '%(' and '%)' inside strings: > |
| 1760 | |
| 1761 | :let moo_no_regexp = 1 |
| 1762 | |
| 1763 | Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: > |
| 1764 | |
| 1765 | :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1 |
| 1766 | |
| 1767 | To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): > |
| 1768 | |
| 1769 | :let moo_builtin_properties = 1 |
| 1770 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1771 | Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1772 | use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group. |
| 1773 | To enable this option: > |
| 1774 | |
| 1775 | :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1 |
| 1776 | |
| 1777 | An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: > |
| 1778 | |
| 1779 | :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained |
| 1780 | |
| 1781 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1782 | MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1783 | |
| 1784 | There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting. |
| 1785 | |
| 1786 | If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > |
| 1787 | |
| 1788 | :let msql_sql_query = 1 |
| 1789 | |
| 1790 | For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can |
| 1791 | set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > |
| 1792 | |
| 1793 | :let msql_minlines = 200 |
| 1794 | |
| 1795 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1796 | NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1797 | |
| 1798 | There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting. |
| 1799 | |
| 1800 | If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as |
| 1801 | errors, use this: > |
| 1802 | |
| 1803 | :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1 |
| 1804 | |
| 1805 | If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset. |
| 1806 | |
| 1807 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1808 | NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1809 | |
| 1810 | The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to |
| 1811 | activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you |
| 1812 | can use them. |
| 1813 | |
| 1814 | For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1815 | processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1816 | features for groff, add the following option to your start-up files: > |
| 1817 | |
| 1818 | :let b:nroff_is_groff = 1 |
| 1819 | |
| 1820 | Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in |
| 1821 | Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and |
| 1822 | there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1823 | you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1824 | can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's |
| 1825 | native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly: |
| 1826 | \[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm |
| 1827 | accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim |
| 1828 | environments. |
| 1829 | |
| 1830 | In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should |
| 1831 | follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation. |
| 1832 | |
| 1833 | 1. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines. |
| 1834 | |
| 1835 | 2. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period, |
| 1836 | exclamation mark, etc. |
| 1837 | |
| 1838 | 3. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a |
| 1839 | carriage return. |
| 1840 | |
| 1841 | The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking |
| 1842 | algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above. |
| 1843 | |
| 1844 | Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and, |
| 1845 | furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and |
| 1846 | vertical space input will be output as is. |
| 1847 | |
| 1848 | Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences |
| 1849 | than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common |
| 1850 | practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1851 | marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1852 | need to maintaining regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing |
| 1853 | spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: > |
| 1854 | |
| 1855 | :let nroff_space_errors = 1 |
| 1856 | |
| 1857 | Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere |
| 1858 | with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching |
| 1859 | highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1860 | "nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1861 | |
| 1862 | hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse |
| 1863 | hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold |
| 1864 | \ gui=reverse,bold |
| 1865 | |
| 1866 | If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as |
| 1867 | with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc |
| 1868 | file: > |
| 1869 | |
| 1870 | let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1 |
| 1871 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 69a7cb4 | 2004-06-20 12:51:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1872 | As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1873 | paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package. |
| 1874 | |
| 1875 | Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling |
| 1876 | groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default. |
| 1877 | |
| 1878 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1879 | OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1880 | |
| 1881 | The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml, |
| 1882 | .mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable > |
| 1883 | |
| 1884 | :let ocaml_revised = 1 |
| 1885 | |
| 1886 | you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported |
| 1887 | by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable > |
| 1888 | |
| 1889 | :let ocaml_noend_error = 1 |
| 1890 | |
| 1891 | prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources |
| 1892 | contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore. |
| 1893 | |
| 1894 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1895 | PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1896 | |
| 1897 | The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extend, .pxml |
| 1898 | and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1899 | as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml |
| 1900 | sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1901 | you set the variable: > |
| 1902 | |
| 1903 | :let papp_include_html=1 |
| 1904 | |
| 1905 | in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml |
| 1906 | sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1907 | edit sensibly. ;) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1908 | |
| 1909 | The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at |
| 1910 | http://papp.plan9.de. |
| 1911 | |
| 1912 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1913 | PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1914 | |
| 1915 | Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal. If the automatic detection |
| 1916 | doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your |
| 1917 | startup vimrc: > |
| 1918 | |
| 1919 | :let filetype_p = "pascal" |
| 1920 | |
| 1921 | The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions |
| 1922 | provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler. |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1923 | Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1924 | enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the |
| 1925 | following line to your startup file: > |
| 1926 | |
| 1927 | :let pascal_traditional=1 |
| 1928 | |
| 1929 | To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments, |
| 1930 | keywords, etc): > |
| 1931 | |
| 1932 | :let pascal_delphi=1 |
| 1933 | |
| 1934 | |
| 1935 | The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +, |
| 1936 | *, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol |
| 1937 | operators, add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 1938 | |
| 1939 | :let pascal_symbol_operator=1 |
| 1940 | |
| 1941 | Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: > |
| 1942 | |
| 1943 | :let pascal_no_functions=1 |
| 1944 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 996343d | 2010-07-04 22:20:21 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 1945 | Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1946 | pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to |
| 1947 | match Turbo Pascal. > |
| 1948 | |
| 1949 | :let pascal_gpc=1 |
| 1950 | |
| 1951 | or > |
| 1952 | |
| 1953 | :let pascal_fpc=1 |
| 1954 | |
| 1955 | To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the |
| 1956 | pascal_one_line_string variable. > |
| 1957 | |
| 1958 | :let pascal_one_line_string=1 |
| 1959 | |
| 1960 | If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs |
| 1961 | will be highlighted as Error. > |
| 1962 | |
| 1963 | :let pascal_no_tabs=1 |
| 1964 | |
| 1965 | |
| 1966 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1967 | PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1968 | |
| 1969 | There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting. |
| 1970 | |
| 1971 | If you use POD files or POD segments, you might: > |
| 1972 | |
| 1973 | :let perl_include_pod = 1 |
| 1974 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1975 | The reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch |
| 1976 | off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1977 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1978 | To handle package references in variable and function names not differently |
| 1979 | from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1980 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1981 | :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1982 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1983 | (In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables" |
| 1984 | enabled it.) |
| 1985 | |
| 1986 | If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: > |
| 1987 | |
| 1988 | :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1 |
| 1989 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 3fdfa4a | 2004-10-07 21:02:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1990 | (In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1991 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1992 | The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be |
| 1993 | highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1994 | perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line. |
| 1995 | |
| 1996 | "hello world!"; qq|hello world|; |
| 1997 | ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement) |
| 1998 | S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement) |
| 1999 | |
| 2000 | (^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all) |
| 2001 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2002 | The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2003 | synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly. |
| 2004 | If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2005 | then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2006 | out the line that causes the mistake. |
| 2007 | |
| 2008 | One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. > |
| 2009 | |
| 2010 | :let perl_no_sync_on_sub |
| 2011 | :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var |
| 2012 | |
| 2013 | Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for |
| 2014 | its attempts in syntax highlighting. > |
| 2015 | |
| 2016 | :let perl_sync_dist = 100 |
| 2017 | |
| 2018 | If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: > |
| 2019 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2020 | :let perl_fold = 1 |
| 2021 | |
| 2022 | If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: > |
| 2023 | |
| 2024 | :let perl_fold_blocks = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2025 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8ada17c | 2006-01-19 22:16:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2026 | To avoid folding packages or subs when perl_fold is let, let the appropriate |
| 2027 | variable(s): > |
| 2028 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2029 | :unlet perl_nofold_packages |
| 2030 | :unlet perl_nofold_subs |
Bram Moolenaar | 8ada17c | 2006-01-19 22:16:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2031 | |
| 2032 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2033 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2034 | PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2035 | |
| 2036 | [note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4 |
| 2037 | it has been renamed to "php"] |
| 2038 | |
| 2039 | There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting. |
| 2040 | |
| 2041 | If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: > |
| 2042 | |
| 2043 | let php_sql_query = 1 |
| 2044 | |
| 2045 | For highlighting the Baselib methods: > |
| 2046 | |
| 2047 | let php_baselib = 1 |
| 2048 | |
| 2049 | Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: > |
| 2050 | |
| 2051 | let php_htmlInStrings = 1 |
| 2052 | |
| 2053 | Using the old colorstyle: > |
| 2054 | |
| 2055 | let php_oldStyle = 1 |
| 2056 | |
| 2057 | Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: > |
| 2058 | |
| 2059 | let php_asp_tags = 1 |
| 2060 | |
| 2061 | Disable short tags: > |
| 2062 | |
| 2063 | let php_noShortTags = 1 |
| 2064 | |
| 2065 | For highlighting parent error ] or ): > |
| 2066 | |
| 2067 | let php_parent_error_close = 1 |
| 2068 | |
| 2069 | For skipping an php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing |
| 2070 | one: > |
| 2071 | |
| 2072 | let php_parent_error_open = 1 |
| 2073 | |
| 2074 | Enable folding for classes and functions: > |
| 2075 | |
| 2076 | let php_folding = 1 |
| 2077 | |
| 2078 | Selecting syncing method: > |
| 2079 | |
| 2080 | let php_sync_method = x |
| 2081 | |
| 2082 | x = -1 to sync by search (default), |
| 2083 | x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards, |
| 2084 | x = 0 to sync from start. |
| 2085 | |
| 2086 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d2cec5b | 2006-03-28 21:08:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2087 | PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax* |
| 2088 | |
| 2089 | TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain" |
| 2090 | variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX, |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2091 | see |ft-tex-plugin|. |
Bram Moolenaar | d2cec5b | 2006-03-28 21:08:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2092 | |
| 2093 | This syntax file has the option > |
| 2094 | |
| 2095 | let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1 |
| 2096 | |
| 2097 | if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}". |
| 2098 | |
| 2099 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2100 | PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2101 | |
| 2102 | PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files |
| 2103 | |
| 2104 | This syntax file has the options: |
| 2105 | |
| 2106 | - ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2107 | definitions. Possible values are |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2108 | |
| 2109 | ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2110 | colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2111 | |
| 2112 | ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate |
| 2113 | statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line |
| 2114 | continuation symbols |
| 2115 | |
| 2116 | The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1. |
| 2117 | |
| 2118 | - ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal |
| 2119 | HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text. |
| 2120 | |
| 2121 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2122 | PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2123 | |
| 2124 | There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting. |
| 2125 | |
| 2126 | If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > |
| 2127 | |
| 2128 | :let phtml_sql_query = 1 |
| 2129 | |
| 2130 | For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can |
| 2131 | set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > |
| 2132 | |
| 2133 | :let phtml_minlines = 200 |
| 2134 | |
| 2135 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2136 | POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2137 | |
| 2138 | There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript. |
| 2139 | |
| 2140 | First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are |
| 2141 | currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original |
| 2142 | and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2. |
| 2143 | Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of |
| 2144 | extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest |
| 2145 | level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want |
| 2146 | highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: > |
| 2147 | |
| 2148 | :let postscr_level=2 |
| 2149 | |
| 2150 | If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is |
| 2151 | the most prevalent version currently. |
| 2152 | |
| 2153 | Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a |
| 2154 | particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of |
| 2155 | PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript! |
| 2156 | |
| 2157 | If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of |
| 2158 | Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as |
| 2159 | follows: > |
| 2160 | |
| 2161 | :let postscr_display=1 |
| 2162 | |
| 2163 | If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of |
| 2164 | Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable |
| 2165 | postscr_ghostscript as follows: > |
| 2166 | |
| 2167 | :let postscr_ghostscript=1 |
| 2168 | |
| 2169 | PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it |
| 2170 | useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can |
| 2171 | cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and |
| 2172 | character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working |
| 2173 | explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be |
| 2174 | highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: > |
| 2175 | |
| 2176 | :let postscr_fonts=1 |
| 2177 | :let postscr_encodings=1 |
| 2178 | |
| 2179 | There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In |
| 2180 | PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their |
| 2181 | operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators, |
| 2182 | if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical |
| 2183 | operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way |
| 2184 | or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be |
| 2185 | highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable |
| 2186 | postscr_andornot_binary as follows: > |
| 2187 | |
| 2188 | :let postscr_andornot_binary=1 |
| 2189 | < |
| 2190 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2191 | *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax* |
| 2192 | PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2193 | |
| 2194 | This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases. |
| 2195 | |
| 2196 | In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match |
| 2197 | the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns |
| 2198 | appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these |
| 2199 | patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or |
| 2200 | "term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap. |
| 2201 | |
| 2202 | For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap |
| 2203 | files, add the following: > |
| 2204 | |
| 2205 | :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" | |
| 2206 | \ set filetype=ptcap |
| 2207 | |
| 2208 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which |
| 2209 | are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines" |
| 2210 | internal variable to a larger number: > |
| 2211 | |
| 2212 | :let ptcap_minlines = 50 |
| 2213 | |
| 2214 | (The default is 20 lines.) |
| 2215 | |
| 2216 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2217 | PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2218 | |
| 2219 | Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection |
| 2220 | doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your |
| 2221 | startup vimrc: > |
| 2222 | :let filetype_w = "progress" |
| 2223 | The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be |
| 2224 | Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: > |
| 2225 | :let filetype_i = "progress" |
| 2226 | :let filetype_p = "progress" |
| 2227 | |
| 2228 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2229 | PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2230 | |
| 2231 | There are four options to control Python syntax highlighting. |
| 2232 | |
| 2233 | For highlighted numbers: > |
| 2234 | :let python_highlight_numbers = 1 |
| 2235 | |
| 2236 | For highlighted builtin functions: > |
| 2237 | :let python_highlight_builtins = 1 |
| 2238 | |
| 2239 | For highlighted standard exceptions: > |
| 2240 | :let python_highlight_exceptions = 1 |
| 2241 | |
| 2242 | For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: |
| 2243 | :let python_highlight_space_errors = 1 |
| 2244 | |
| 2245 | If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the |
| 2246 | preceding three options): > |
| 2247 | :let python_highlight_all = 1 |
| 2248 | |
| 2249 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2250 | QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2251 | |
| 2252 | The Quake syntax definition should work for most any FPS (First Person |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2253 | Shooter) based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2254 | a bit between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the |
| 2255 | syntax definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2256 | users to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2257 | can be set for the following effects: |
| 2258 | |
| 2259 | set to highlight commands only available in Quake: > |
| 2260 | :let quake_is_quake1 = 1 |
| 2261 | |
| 2262 | set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: > |
| 2263 | :let quake_is_quake2 = 1 |
| 2264 | |
| 2265 | set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: > |
| 2266 | :let quake_is_quake3 = 1 |
| 2267 | |
| 2268 | Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more |
| 2269 | commands than are actually available to you by the game. |
| 2270 | |
| 2271 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2272 | READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2273 | |
| 2274 | The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2275 | few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2276 | items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the |
| 2277 | command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: > |
| 2278 | let readline_has_bash = 1 |
| 2279 | |
| 2280 | This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and |
| 2281 | later, and part earlier) adds. |
| 2282 | |
| 2283 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2284 | REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2285 | |
| 2286 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed |
| 2287 | when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable |
| 2288 | to a larger number: > |
| 2289 | :let rexx_minlines = 50 |
| 2290 | This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first |
| 2291 | displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger |
| 2292 | number is that redrawing can become slow. |
| 2293 | |
| 2294 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2295 | RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2296 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2297 | There are a number of options to the Ruby syntax highlighting. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2298 | |
| 2299 | By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2300 | of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2301 | experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support) |
| 2302 | you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2303 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2304 | :let ruby_no_expensive = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2305 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2306 | In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords. |
| 2307 | |
| 2308 | If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while |
| 2309 | scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting |
| 2310 | the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2311 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2312 | :let ruby_minlines = 100 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2313 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2314 | Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your |
| 2315 | largest class or module. |
| 2316 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2317 | Highlighting of special identifiers can be disabled by removing the |
| 2318 | rubyIdentifier highlighting: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2319 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2320 | :hi link rubyIdentifier NONE |
| 2321 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2322 | This will prevent highlighting of special identifiers like "ConstantName", |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2323 | "$global_var", "@@class_var", "@instance_var", "| block_param |", and |
| 2324 | ":symbol". |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2325 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2326 | Significant methods of Kernel, Module and Object are highlighted by default. |
| 2327 | This can be disabled by defining "ruby_no_special_methods": > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2328 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2329 | :let ruby_no_special_methods = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2330 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2331 | This will prevent highlighting of important methods such as "require", "attr", |
| 2332 | "private", "raise" and "proc". |
| 2333 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2334 | Ruby operators can be highlighted. This is enabled by defining |
| 2335 | "ruby_operators": > |
| 2336 | |
| 2337 | :let ruby_operators = 1 |
| 2338 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2339 | Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": > |
| 2340 | |
| 2341 | :let ruby_space_errors = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2342 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2343 | This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character |
| 2344 | as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and |
| 2345 | "ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after |
| 2346 | spaces respectively. |
| 2347 | |
| 2348 | Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": > |
| 2349 | |
| 2350 | :let ruby_fold = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2351 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2352 | This will set the 'foldmethod' option to "syntax" and allow folding of |
| 2353 | classes, modules, methods, code blocks, heredocs and comments. |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2354 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2355 | Folding of multiline comments can be disabled by defining |
| 2356 | "ruby_no_comment_fold": > |
| 2357 | |
| 2358 | :let ruby_no_comment_fold = 1 |
| 2359 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2360 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2361 | SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 21cf823 | 2004-07-16 20:18:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2362 | |
| 2363 | By default only R5RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented. |
| 2364 | |
| 2365 | MzScheme-specific stuff will be used if b:is_mzscheme or g:is_mzscheme |
| 2366 | variables are defined. |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2367 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 293ee4d | 2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2368 | Also scheme.vim supports keywords of the Chicken Scheme->C compiler. Define |
| 2369 | b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them. |
Bram Moolenaar | 21cf823 | 2004-07-16 20:18:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2370 | |
| 2371 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2372 | SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2373 | |
| 2374 | The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many |
| 2375 | of them it's almost impossibly to cope. |
| 2376 | |
| 2377 | The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are |
| 2378 | case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2379 | used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2380 | highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: > |
| 2381 | :let sdl_2000=1 |
| 2382 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2383 | This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2384 | keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: > |
| 2385 | :let SDL_no_96=1 |
| 2386 | |
| 2387 | |
| 2388 | The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very |
| 2389 | satisfied with it for my own projects. |
| 2390 | |
| 2391 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2392 | SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2393 | |
| 2394 | To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo |
| 2395 | highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting > |
| 2396 | |
| 2397 | :let highlight_sedtabs = 1 |
| 2398 | |
| 2399 | in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs |
| 2400 | inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included |
| 2401 | by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is |
| 2402 | also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that, |
| 2403 | you can easily count the number of tabs in a string. |
| 2404 | |
| 2405 | Bugs: |
| 2406 | |
| 2407 | The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute |
| 2408 | command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned, |
| 2409 | transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong. |
| 2410 | (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the |
| 2411 | involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for |
| 2412 | each plausible pattern delimiter). |
| 2413 | |
| 2414 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2415 | SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2416 | |
| 2417 | The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows. |
| 2418 | |
| 2419 | The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag. |
| 2420 | This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for |
| 2421 | closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are |
| 2422 | defined for you) |
| 2423 | |
| 2424 | Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag |
| 2425 | names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors. |
| 2426 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2427 | Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2428 | names are colored differently than unknown ones. |
| 2429 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2430 | Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2431 | are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal |
| 2432 | text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal> |
| 2433 | <replaceable> <ulink> and <link>. |
| 2434 | |
| 2435 | If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the |
| 2436 | following syntax groups: |
| 2437 | |
| 2438 | - sgmlBold |
| 2439 | - sgmlBoldItalic |
| 2440 | - sgmlUnderline |
| 2441 | - sgmlItalic |
| 2442 | - sgmlLink for links |
| 2443 | |
| 2444 | To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the |
| 2445 | following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files |
| 2446 | are read during initialization) > |
| 2447 | let sgml_my_rendering=1 |
| 2448 | |
| 2449 | You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your |
| 2450 | vimrc file: > |
| 2451 | let sgml_no_rendering=1 |
| 2452 | |
| 2453 | (Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>) |
| 2454 | |
| 2455 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2456 | SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2457 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2458 | This covers the "normal" Unix (Bourne) sh, bash and the Korn shell. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2459 | |
| 2460 | Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that |
| 2461 | various filenames are of specific types: > |
| 2462 | |
| 2463 | ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh |
| 2464 | bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash |
| 2465 | < |
| 2466 | If none of these cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined |
| 2467 | (ex. /bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, |
| 2468 | then that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to |
| 2469 | be shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc904b | 2006-04-13 20:37:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2470 | sh is symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix). |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2471 | |
| 2472 | One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following three |
| 2473 | variables in your <.vimrc>: |
| 2474 | |
| 2475 | ksh: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc904b | 2006-04-13 20:37:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2476 | let g:is_kornshell = 1 |
| 2477 | < posix: (using this is the same as setting is_kornshell to 1) > |
| 2478 | let g:is_posix = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2479 | < bash: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc904b | 2006-04-13 20:37:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2480 | let g:is_bash = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2481 | < sh: (default) Bourne shell > |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc904b | 2006-04-13 20:37:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2482 | let g:is_sh = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2483 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2484 | If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a |
| 2485 | default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2486 | the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration |
| 2487 | statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the |
| 2488 | sh your system uses in your <.vimrc>. |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2489 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2490 | The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: > |
| 2491 | |
| 2492 | let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding) |
| 2493 | let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding) |
| 2494 | let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding) |
| 2495 | let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2496 | > |
| 2497 | then various syntax items (HereDocuments and function bodies) become |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2498 | syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together |
| 2499 | to get multiple types of folding: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2500 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2501 | let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding) |
| 2502 | |
| 2503 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed |
| 2504 | when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2505 | to a larger number. Example: > |
| 2506 | |
| 2507 | let sh_minlines = 500 |
| 2508 | |
| 2509 | This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first |
| 2510 | displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger |
| 2511 | number is that redrawing can become slow. |
| 2512 | |
| 2513 | If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To |
| 2514 | reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: > |
| 2515 | |
| 2516 | let sh_maxlines = 100 |
| 2517 | < |
| 2518 | The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to |
| 2519 | speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear. |
| 2520 | |
| 2521 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2522 | SPEEDUP (AspenTech plant simulator) *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2523 | |
| 2524 | The Speedup syntax file has some options: |
| 2525 | |
| 2526 | - strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for |
| 2527 | sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not |
| 2528 | other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section). |
| 2529 | |
| 2530 | - highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types |
| 2531 | like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2532 | plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2533 | the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include |
| 2534 | them in the syntax file. |
| 2535 | |
| 2536 | - oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the |
| 2537 | highlighting of # style comments. |
| 2538 | |
| 2539 | oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even |
| 2540 | number of #s. |
| 2541 | |
| 2542 | oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2543 | error. This is the default setting. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2544 | |
| 2545 | oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains |
| 2546 | more than one #. |
| 2547 | |
| 2548 | Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2549 | PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2550 | fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of |
| 2551 | the syntax file. |
| 2552 | |
| 2553 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2554 | SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax* |
| 2555 | *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 1056d98 | 2006-03-09 22:37:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2556 | *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2557 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 1056d98 | 2006-03-09 22:37:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2558 | While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own |
| 2559 | custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of |
| 2560 | SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default. |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2561 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 1056d98 | 2006-03-09 22:37:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2562 | Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax |
| 2563 | scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL |
| 2564 | supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a |
| 2565 | buffer by buffer basis. |
| 2566 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2567 | For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|. |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2568 | |
| 2569 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2570 | TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2571 | |
| 2572 | This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim| |
| 2573 | for how the filetype is detected. |
| 2574 | |
| 2575 | Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2576 | is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2577 | this line to your .vimrc: > |
| 2578 | |
| 2579 | :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0 |
| 2580 | |
| 2581 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed |
| 2582 | when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable |
| 2583 | to a larger number: > |
| 2584 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 2585 | :let tcsh_minlines = 1000 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2586 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 2587 | This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first |
| 2588 | displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then |
| 2589 | synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for |
| 2590 | tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that |
| 2591 | redrawing can become slow. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2592 | |
| 2593 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2594 | TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2595 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2596 | *tex-folding* |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2597 | Want Syntax Folding? ~ |
| 2598 | |
| 2599 | As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters, |
| 2600 | sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put > |
| 2601 | let g:tex_fold_enabled=1 |
| 2602 | in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a |
| 2603 | modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: > |
| 2604 | % vim: fdm=syntax |
| 2605 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2606 | *tex-nospell* |
| 2607 | Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~ |
| 2608 | |
| 2609 | Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would |
| 2610 | prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do |
| 2611 | this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: > |
| 2612 | let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1 |
| 2613 | < |
| 2614 | *tex-runon* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2615 | Run-on Comments/Math? ~ |
| 2616 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2617 | The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The |
| 2618 | highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and |
| 2619 | texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones |
| 2620 | terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized |
| 2621 | as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2622 | special "TeX comment" has been provided > |
| 2623 | %stopzone |
| 2624 | which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a |
| 2625 | texMathZone. |
| 2626 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2627 | *tex-slow* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2628 | Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~ |
| 2629 | |
| 2630 | If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for > |
| 2631 | :syn sync maxlines=200 |
| 2632 | :syn sync minlines=50 |
| 2633 | (especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2634 | increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group, |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2635 | if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?). |
| 2636 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2637 | *tex-morecommands* *tex-package* |
| 2638 | Want To Highlight More Commands? ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2639 | |
| 2640 | LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full |
| 2641 | of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a |
| 2642 | package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support |
| 2643 | it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the |
| 2644 | techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided |
| 2645 | by syntax/tex.vim. |
| 2646 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2647 | *tex-error* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2648 | Excessive Error Highlighting? ~ |
| 2649 | |
| 2650 | The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus, |
| 2651 | although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate |
| 2652 | errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you, |
| 2653 | you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: > |
| 2654 | let tex_no_error=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2655 | and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2656 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2657 | *tex-math* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2658 | Need a new Math Group? ~ |
| 2659 | |
| 2660 | If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following |
| 2661 | code shows you an example as to how you might do so: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2662 | call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform) |
| 2663 | You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix |
| 2664 | (currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself). |
| 2665 | As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: > |
| 2666 | call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1) |
| 2667 | You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group, |
| 2668 | and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim. |
| 2669 | The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group |
| 2670 | has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*). |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2671 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2672 | *tex-style* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2673 | Starting a New Style? ~ |
| 2674 | |
| 2675 | One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in |
| 2676 | commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the |
| 2677 | following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag |
| 2678 | such use of @ as an error. To solve this: > |
| 2679 | |
| 2680 | :let b:tex_stylish = 1 |
| 2681 | :set ft=tex |
| 2682 | |
| 2683 | Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim> |
| 2684 | always accept such use of @. |
| 2685 | |
| 2686 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2687 | TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2688 | |
| 2689 | There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting. |
| 2690 | |
| 2691 | For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can |
| 2692 | set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > |
| 2693 | |
| 2694 | :let tf_minlines = your choice |
| 2695 | |
| 2696 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2697 | VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax* |
| 2698 | *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines* |
Bram Moolenaar | 996343d | 2010-07-04 22:20:21 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2699 | There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2700 | updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the |
| 2701 | g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to |
| 2702 | improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2703 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2704 | g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines |
| 2705 | g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines |
| 2706 | < |
| 2707 | (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of |
| 2708 | these two options) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2709 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2710 | *g:vimsyn_embed* |
| 2711 | The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of |
| 2712 | embedded script highlighting they wish to have. > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2713 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2714 | g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't embed any scripts |
| 2715 | g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : embed mzscheme (but only if vim supports it) |
| 2716 | g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : embed perl (but only if vim supports it) |
| 2717 | g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : embed python (but only if vim supports it) |
| 2718 | g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : embed ruby (but only if vim supports it) |
| 2719 | g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : embed tcl (but only if vim supports it) |
| 2720 | < |
| 2721 | By default, g:vimsyn_embed is "mpPr"; ie. syntax/vim.vim will support |
| 2722 | highlighting mzscheme, perl, python, and ruby by default. Vim's has("tcl") |
| 2723 | test appears to hang vim when tcl is not truly available. Thus, by default, |
| 2724 | tcl is not supported for embedding (but those of you who like tcl embedded in |
| 2725 | their vim syntax highlighting can simply include it in the g:vimembedscript |
| 2726 | option). |
| 2727 | *g:vimsyn_folding* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2728 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2729 | Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2730 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2731 | g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding |
| 2732 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups |
| 2733 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions |
| 2734 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script |
| 2735 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script |
| 2736 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script |
| 2737 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script |
| 2738 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2739 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2740 | *g:vimsyn_noerror* |
Bram Moolenaar | 437df8f | 2006-04-27 21:47:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2741 | Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; VimL is a |
| 2742 | difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2743 | highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 437df8f | 2006-04-27 21:47:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2744 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2745 | let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1 |
| 2746 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 437df8f | 2006-04-27 21:47:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2747 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2748 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2749 | XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2750 | |
| 2751 | The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both |
| 2752 | variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect. |
| 2753 | You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable |
| 2754 | xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in |
| 2755 | your .vimrc. Example: > |
| 2756 | :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3 |
| 2757 | When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable. |
| 2758 | |
| 2759 | Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use |
| 2760 | "SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name |
| 2761 | highlighted. |
| 2762 | |
| 2763 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2764 | XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2765 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2766 | Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2767 | setting a global variable: > |
| 2768 | |
| 2769 | :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1 |
| 2770 | < |
| 2771 | *xml-folding* |
| 2772 | The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2773 | start and end tags. This can be turned on by > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2774 | |
| 2775 | :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1 |
| 2776 | :set foldmethod=syntax |
| 2777 | |
| 2778 | Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly, |
| 2779 | especially for large files. |
| 2780 | |
| 2781 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2782 | X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2783 | |
| 2784 | xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the |
| 2785 | XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings, |
| 2786 | you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm". |
| 2787 | |
| 2788 | To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it |
| 2789 | somewhere else with "P". |
| 2790 | |
| 2791 | Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: > |
| 2792 | :function! GetPixel() |
Bram Moolenaar | 61660ea | 2006-04-07 21:40:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2793 | : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1] |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2794 | : echo c |
| 2795 | : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c |
| 2796 | : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c |
| 2797 | :endfunction |
| 2798 | :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR> |
| 2799 | :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor |
| 2800 | This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen. |
| 2801 | It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you |
| 2802 | must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it. |
| 2803 | |
| 2804 | It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: > |
| 2805 | :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-* |
| 2806 | |
| 2807 | ============================================================================== |
| 2808 | 5. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410* |
| 2809 | |
| 2810 | Vim understands three types of syntax items: |
| 2811 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2812 | 1. Keyword |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2813 | It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword' |
| 2814 | option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a |
| 2815 | complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match). |
| 2816 | The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because |
| 2817 | "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is. |
| 2818 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2819 | 2. Match |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2820 | This is a match with a single regexp pattern. |
| 2821 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2822 | 3. Region |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2823 | This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match |
| 2824 | with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A |
| 2825 | "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern. |
| 2826 | |
| 2827 | Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group |
| 2828 | you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item |
| 2829 | to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment, |
| 2830 | and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a |
| 2831 | "Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make |
| 2832 | one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group. |
| 2833 | This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting |
| 2834 | each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting |
| 2835 | for a lot of groups. |
| 2836 | |
| 2837 | Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight |
| 2838 | group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used |
| 2839 | for the syntax group with the same name. |
| 2840 | |
| 2841 | In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was |
| 2842 | defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by |
| 2843 | using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a |
| 2844 | match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a |
| 2845 | keyword with ignoring case. |
| 2846 | |
| 2847 | |
| 2848 | PRIORITY *:syn-priority* |
| 2849 | |
| 2850 | When several syntax items may match, these rules are used: |
| 2851 | |
| 2852 | 1. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item |
| 2853 | defined last has priority. |
| 2854 | 2. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items. |
| 2855 | 3. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that |
| 2856 | start in later positions. |
| 2857 | |
| 2858 | |
| 2859 | DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390* |
| 2860 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2861 | :sy[ntax] case [match | ignore] |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2862 | This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with |
| 2863 | matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using |
| 2864 | "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all |
| 2865 | items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected. |
| 2866 | |
| 2867 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2868 | SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell* |
| 2869 | |
| 2870 | :sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default] |
| 2871 | This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not |
| 2872 | in a syntax item: |
| 2873 | |
| 2874 | toplevel: Text is spell checked. |
| 2875 | notoplevel: Text is not spell checked. |
| 2876 | default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking. |
| 2877 | |
| 2878 | For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters |
| 2879 | |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then |
| 2880 | spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel". |
| 2881 | |
| 2882 | To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set. |
| 2883 | |
| 2884 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2885 | DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword* |
| 2886 | |
| 2887 | :sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}] |
| 2888 | |
| 2889 | This defines a number of keywords. |
| 2890 | |
| 2891 | {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment". |
| 2892 | [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. |
| 2893 | {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group. |
| 2894 | |
| 2895 | Example: > |
| 2896 | :syntax keyword Type int long char |
| 2897 | < |
| 2898 | The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to |
| 2899 | all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword. |
| 2900 | These examples do exactly the same: > |
| 2901 | :syntax keyword Type contained int long char |
| 2902 | :syntax keyword Type int long contained char |
| 2903 | :syntax keyword Type int long char contained |
Bram Moolenaar | fc1421e | 2006-04-20 22:17:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2904 | < *E789* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2905 | When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in |
| 2906 | Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the |
| 2907 | variations at once: > |
| 2908 | :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext] |
| 2909 | < |
| 2910 | Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the |
| 2911 | characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character |
| 2912 | isn't, the keyword will never be recognized. |
| 2913 | Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in |
| 2914 | 'iskeyword'. |
| 2915 | |
| 2916 | A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the |
| 2917 | keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest |
| 2918 | and a keyword can't contain anything else. |
| 2919 | |
| 2920 | Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even |
| 2921 | one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match |
| 2922 | instead. |
| 2923 | |
| 2924 | The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters. |
| 2925 | |
| 2926 | The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment |
| 2927 | differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained |
| 2928 | and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2929 | highlight group. Example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2930 | :syn keyword vimCommand tag |
| 2931 | :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag |
| 2932 | < When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand" |
| 2933 | highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that |
| 2934 | contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used. |
| 2935 | |
| 2936 | |
| 2937 | DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match* |
| 2938 | |
| 2939 | :sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}] [excludenl] {pattern} [{options}] |
| 2940 | |
| 2941 | This defines one match. |
| 2942 | |
| 2943 | {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment". |
| 2944 | [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. |
| 2945 | [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$" |
| 2946 | extend a containing match or region. Must be |
| 2947 | given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl| |
| 2948 | {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match. |
| 2949 | See |:syn-pattern| below. |
| 2950 | Note that the pattern may match more than one |
| 2951 | line, which makes the match depend on where |
| 2952 | Vim starts searching for the pattern. You |
| 2953 | need to make sure syncing takes care of this. |
| 2954 | |
| 2955 | Example (match a character constant): > |
| 2956 | :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1 |
| 2957 | < |
| 2958 | |
| 2959 | DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end* |
| 2960 | *E398* *E399* |
| 2961 | :sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}] |
| 2962 | [matchgroup={group-name}] |
| 2963 | [keepend] |
| 2964 | [extend] |
| 2965 | [excludenl] |
| 2966 | start={start_pattern} .. |
| 2967 | [skip={skip_pattern}] |
| 2968 | end={end_pattern} .. |
| 2969 | [{options}] |
| 2970 | |
| 2971 | This defines one region. It may span several lines. |
| 2972 | |
| 2973 | {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment". |
| 2974 | [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. |
| 2975 | [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following |
| 2976 | start or end pattern matches only. Not used |
| 2977 | for the text in between the matched start and |
| 2978 | end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using |
| 2979 | a different group for the start or end match. |
| 2980 | See |:syn-matchgroup|. |
| 2981 | keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a |
| 2982 | match with the end pattern. See |
| 2983 | |:syn-keepend|. |
| 2984 | extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2985 | is contained in. See |:syn-extend|. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2986 | excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$" |
| 2987 | extend a containing match or item. Only |
| 2988 | useful for end patterns. Must be given before |
| 2989 | the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl| |
| 2990 | start={start_pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of |
| 2991 | the region. See |:syn-pattern| below. |
| 2992 | skip={skip_pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside |
| 2993 | the region where not to look for the end |
| 2994 | pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below. |
| 2995 | end={end_pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of |
| 2996 | the region. See |:syn-pattern| below. |
| 2997 | |
| 2998 | Example: > |
| 2999 | :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+ |
| 3000 | < |
| 3001 | The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order. |
| 3002 | There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more |
| 3003 | start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip |
| 3004 | pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It |
| 3005 | is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign |
| 3006 | (although it mostly looks better without white space). |
| 3007 | |
| 3008 | When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these |
| 3009 | is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start |
| 3010 | patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for |
| 3011 | the end patterns. |
| 3012 | |
| 3013 | The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern. |
| 3014 | Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the |
| 3015 | end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern. |
| 3016 | |
| 3017 | The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the |
| 3018 | search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what |
| 3019 | you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in |
| 3020 | the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble. |
| 3021 | |
| 3022 | Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start |
| 3023 | pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT |
| 3024 | work: > |
| 3025 | :syn region First start="(" end=":" |
| 3026 | :syn region Second start="(" end=";" |
| 3027 | < The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has |
| 3028 | higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next |
| 3029 | ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: > |
| 3030 | :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:" |
| 3031 | :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};" |
| 3032 | < This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and |
| 3033 | repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible). |
| 3034 | |
| 3035 | *:syn-keepend* |
| 3036 | By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern. |
| 3037 | This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with |
| 3038 | "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}" |
| 3039 | will then end the contained region, but not the outer region: |
| 3040 | { starts outer "{}" region |
| 3041 | { starts contained "{}" region |
| 3042 | } ends contained "{}" region |
| 3043 | } ends outer "{} region |
| 3044 | If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching |
| 3045 | of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item. |
| 3046 | This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for |
| 3047 | contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing |
| 3048 | that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: > |
| 3049 | :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+ |
| 3050 | :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend |
| 3051 | < The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line, |
| 3052 | even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>. |
| 3053 | |
| 3054 | When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried |
| 3055 | after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first |
| 3056 | encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any |
| 3057 | contained matches. |
| 3058 | *:syn-extend* |
| 3059 | The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument. |
| 3060 | When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses |
| 3061 | "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be |
| 3062 | extended. |
| 3063 | This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while |
| 3064 | others don't. Example: > |
| 3065 | |
| 3066 | :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript |
| 3067 | :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained |
| 3068 | :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend |
| 3069 | |
| 3070 | < Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue |
| 3071 | further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript |
| 3072 | item does extend the htmlRef item. |
| 3073 | |
| 3074 | Another example: > |
| 3075 | :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend |
| 3076 | < This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be |
| 3077 | changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to |
| 3078 | highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it |
| 3079 | includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested |
| 3080 | region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in. |
| 3081 | |
| 3082 | *:syn-excludenl* |
| 3083 | When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$' |
| 3084 | to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is |
| 3085 | contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with |
| 3086 | "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue |
| 3087 | that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default |
| 3088 | behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it: |
| 3089 | 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all |
| 3090 | contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be |
| 3091 | used when all contained items must not extend the containing item. |
| 3092 | 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match |
| 3093 | from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if |
| 3094 | only some contained items must not extend the containing item. |
| 3095 | "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to. |
| 3096 | |
| 3097 | *:syn-matchgroup* |
| 3098 | "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern |
| 3099 | differently than the body of the region. Example: > |
| 3100 | :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+ |
| 3101 | < This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in |
| 3102 | between with the "String" group. |
| 3103 | The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow, |
| 3104 | until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not |
| 3105 | using a matchgroup. |
| 3106 | |
| 3107 | In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the |
| 3108 | contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid |
| 3109 | that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When |
| 3110 | using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern |
| 3111 | match that is highlighted with "matchgroup". |
| 3112 | |
| 3113 | Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in |
| 3114 | different colors: > |
| 3115 | :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2 |
| 3116 | :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained |
| 3117 | :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained |
| 3118 | :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red |
| 3119 | :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue |
| 3120 | :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen |
| 3121 | |
| 3122 | ============================================================================== |
| 3123 | 6. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments* |
| 3124 | |
| 3125 | The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments. |
| 3126 | The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order |
| 3127 | and may be mixed with patterns. |
| 3128 | |
| 3129 | Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments |
| 3130 | can not be used for all commands: |
| 3131 | *E395* *E396* |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3132 | contains oneline fold display extend concealends~ |
| 3133 | :syntax keyword - - - - - - |
| 3134 | :syntax match yes - yes yes yes - |
| 3135 | :syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3136 | |
| 3137 | These arguments can be used for all three commands: |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3138 | conceal |
| 3139 | cchar |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3140 | contained |
| 3141 | containedin |
| 3142 | nextgroup |
| 3143 | transparent |
| 3144 | skipwhite |
| 3145 | skipnl |
| 3146 | skipempty |
| 3147 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3148 | conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal* |
| 3149 | |
| 3150 | When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable. |
Bram Moolenaar | 370df58 | 2010-06-22 05:16:38 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3151 | Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the |
| 3152 | 'conceallevel' option. If 'modifiable' option is on, concealable items |
| 3153 | in the current line are always displayed unconcealed to be able to edit |
| 3154 | the line. |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3155 | |
| 3156 | concealends *:syn-concealends* |
| 3157 | |
| 3158 | When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of |
| 3159 | the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable. |
| 3160 | Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the |
| 3161 | 'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately |
| 3162 | in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup" |
| 3163 | |
| 3164 | cchar *:syn-cchar* |
| 3165 | |
| 3166 | The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item |
| 3167 | when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal |
| 3168 | argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal |
| 3169 | character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. Example: > |
| 3170 | :syntax match Entity "&" conceal cchar=& |
Bram Moolenaar | 9028b10 | 2010-07-11 16:58:51 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3171 | See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3172 | |
| 3173 | contained *:syn-contained* |
| 3174 | |
| 3175 | When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at |
| 3176 | the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of |
| 3177 | another match. Example: > |
| 3178 | :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained |
| 3179 | :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo |
| 3180 | |
| 3181 | |
| 3182 | display *:syn-display* |
| 3183 | |
| 3184 | If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the |
| 3185 | detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting, |
| 3186 | by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is |
| 3187 | to be displayed. |
| 3188 | |
| 3189 | Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these |
| 3190 | conditions: |
| 3191 | - The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region |
| 3192 | for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next |
| 3193 | line. |
| 3194 | - The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or |
| 3195 | make it continue on the next line. |
| 3196 | - The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example |
| 3197 | for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display", |
| 3198 | because it may make that preprocessor match shorter. |
| 3199 | - The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise, |
| 3200 | and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a |
| 3201 | "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would |
| 3202 | match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line. |
| 3203 | |
| 3204 | Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used: |
| 3205 | - match with a number |
| 3206 | - match with a label |
| 3207 | |
| 3208 | |
| 3209 | transparent *:syn-transparent* |
| 3210 | |
| 3211 | If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted |
| 3212 | itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This |
| 3213 | is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used |
| 3214 | only to skip over a part of the text. |
| 3215 | |
| 3216 | The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in, |
| 3217 | unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To |
| 3218 | avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which |
| 3219 | highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": > |
| 3220 | :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim |
| 3221 | :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained |
| 3222 | :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE |
| 3223 | :hi link myString String |
| 3224 | :hi link myWord Comment |
| 3225 | Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last |
| 3226 | match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent" |
| 3227 | argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But |
| 3228 | it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left |
| 3229 | out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow |
| 3230 | "myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Constant. This |
| 3231 | happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same |
| 3232 | position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here. |
| 3233 | |
| 3234 | When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained |
| 3235 | items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you |
| 3236 | see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look |
| 3237 | through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture: |
| 3238 | |
| 3239 | look from here |
| 3240 | |
| 3241 | | | | | | | |
| 3242 | V V V V V V |
| 3243 | |
| 3244 | xxxx yyy more contained items |
| 3245 | .................... contained item (transparent) |
| 3246 | ============================= first item |
| 3247 | |
| 3248 | The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a |
| 3249 | transparent group. |
| 3250 | |
| 3251 | What you see is: |
| 3252 | |
| 3253 | =======xxxx=======yyy======== |
| 3254 | |
| 3255 | Thus you look through the transparent "....". |
| 3256 | |
| 3257 | |
| 3258 | oneline *:syn-oneline* |
| 3259 | |
| 3260 | The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line |
| 3261 | boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the |
| 3262 | region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on |
| 3263 | the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line |
| 3264 | continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first |
| 3265 | line, otherwise the region doesn't even start. |
| 3266 | |
| 3267 | When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end |
| 3268 | pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The |
| 3269 | end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument |
| 3270 | means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must |
| 3271 | be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a |
| 3272 | line break. |
| 3273 | |
| 3274 | |
| 3275 | fold *:syn-fold* |
| 3276 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3277 | The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3278 | Example: > |
| 3279 | :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold |
| 3280 | :syn sync fromstart |
| 3281 | :set foldmethod=syntax |
| 3282 | This will make each {} block form one fold. |
| 3283 | |
| 3284 | The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item |
| 3285 | ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold. |
| 3286 | The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds. |
| 3287 | {not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature} |
| 3288 | |
| 3289 | |
| 3290 | *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409* |
| 3291 | contains={groupname},.. |
| 3292 | |
| 3293 | The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These |
| 3294 | groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the |
| 3295 | containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and |
| 3296 | regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in |
| 3297 | this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used |
| 3298 | here. |
| 3299 | |
| 3300 | contains=ALL |
| 3301 | If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all |
| 3302 | groups will be accepted inside the item. |
| 3303 | |
| 3304 | contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},.. |
| 3305 | If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all |
| 3306 | groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that |
| 3307 | are listed. Example: > |
| 3308 | :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function |
| 3309 | |
| 3310 | contains=TOP |
| 3311 | If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all |
| 3312 | groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained" |
| 3313 | argument. |
| 3314 | contains=TOP,{group-name},.. |
| 3315 | Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed. |
| 3316 | |
| 3317 | contains=CONTAINED |
| 3318 | If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then |
| 3319 | all groups will be accepted that have the "contained" |
| 3320 | argument. |
| 3321 | contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},.. |
| 3322 | Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are |
| 3323 | listed. |
| 3324 | |
| 3325 | |
| 3326 | The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names |
| 3327 | that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used). |
| 3328 | The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: > |
| 3329 | ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3] |
| 3330 | The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups |
| 3331 | that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax |
| 3332 | command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting |
| 3333 | syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because |
| 3334 | the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the |
| 3335 | group names. |
| 3336 | |
| 3337 | The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a |
| 3338 | region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used |
| 3339 | |:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the |
| 3340 | region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the |
| 3341 | area that is highlighted |
| 3342 | |
| 3343 | |
| 3344 | containedin={groupname}... *:syn-containedin* |
| 3345 | |
| 3346 | The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The |
| 3347 | item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the |
| 3348 | containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item. |
| 3349 | |
| 3350 | The {groupname}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above. |
| 3351 | |
| 3352 | This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to |
| 3353 | be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition |
| 3354 | of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading |
| 3355 | the C syntax: > |
| 3356 | :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained |
| 3357 | Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top |
| 3358 | level. |
| 3359 | |
| 3360 | Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can |
| 3361 | appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that |
| 3362 | keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't |
| 3363 | work. |
| 3364 | |
| 3365 | |
| 3366 | nextgroup={groupname},.. *:syn-nextgroup* |
| 3367 | |
| 3368 | The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names, |
| 3369 | separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns). |
| 3370 | |
| 3371 | If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be |
| 3372 | tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have |
| 3373 | a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group |
| 3374 | will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the |
| 3375 | current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all |
| 3376 | other groups. Example: > |
| 3377 | :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo |
| 3378 | :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller |
| 3379 | :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained |
| 3380 | |
| 3381 | This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a |
| 3382 | "Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for |
| 3383 | highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. > |
| 3384 | |
| 3385 | Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf |
| 3386 | fff bbb fff bbb |
| 3387 | |
| 3388 | Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar. |
| 3389 | when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be |
| 3390 | highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match |
| 3391 | would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|). |
| 3392 | |
| 3393 | |
| 3394 | skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite* |
| 3395 | skipnl *:syn-skipnl* |
| 3396 | skipempty *:syn-skipempty* |
| 3397 | |
| 3398 | These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be |
| 3399 | used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text: |
Bram Moolenaar | dd2a0d8 | 2007-05-12 15:07:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3400 | skipwhite skip over space and tab characters |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3401 | skipnl skip over the end of a line |
| 3402 | skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl") |
| 3403 | |
| 3404 | When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no |
| 3405 | next group that matches the white space. |
| 3406 | |
| 3407 | When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next |
| 3408 | line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current |
| 3409 | line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after |
| 3410 | the current item in the same line. |
| 3411 | |
| 3412 | When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other |
| 3413 | groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried |
| 3414 | for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white |
| 3415 | space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items. |
| 3416 | |
| 3417 | Example: > |
| 3418 | :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty |
| 3419 | :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained |
| 3420 | :syn match ifline "endif" contained |
| 3421 | Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also |
| 3422 | match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes |
| 3423 | precedence. |
| 3424 | Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add |
| 3425 | "contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the |
| 3426 | example). |
| 3427 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3428 | IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit* |
| 3429 | |
| 3430 | :sy[ntax] conceal [on|off] |
| 3431 | This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords, |
| 3432 | matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal |
| 3433 | on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region" |
| 3434 | defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal |
| 3435 | off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be |
| 3436 | given explicitly. |
| 3437 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3438 | ============================================================================== |
| 3439 | 7. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402* |
| 3440 | |
| 3441 | In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical |
| 3442 | characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to |
| 3443 | use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can |
| 3444 | use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: > |
| 3445 | :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/" |
| 3446 | :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+ |
| 3447 | |
| 3448 | See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3449 | always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3450 | value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is |
| 3451 | not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and |
| 3452 | independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings. |
| 3453 | |
| 3454 | Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*". |
| 3455 | This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere. |
| 3456 | |
| 3457 | *:syn-pattern-offset* |
| 3458 | The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to |
| 3459 | change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the |
| 3460 | match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both |
| 3461 | are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip |
| 3462 | pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern. |
| 3463 | |
| 3464 | The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}" |
| 3465 | The {what} can be one of seven strings: |
| 3466 | |
| 3467 | ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text |
| 3468 | me Match End offset for the end of the matched text |
| 3469 | hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts |
| 3470 | he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends |
| 3471 | rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts |
| 3472 | re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends |
| 3473 | lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern |
| 3474 | |
| 3475 | The {offset} can be: |
| 3476 | |
| 3477 | s start of the matched pattern |
| 3478 | s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right |
| 3479 | s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left |
| 3480 | e end of the matched pattern |
| 3481 | e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right |
| 3482 | e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left |
| 3483 | {nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars to the left |
| 3484 | |
| 3485 | Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3". |
| 3486 | |
| 3487 | Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always |
| 3488 | meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used: |
| 3489 | |
| 3490 | ms me hs he rs re lc ~ |
| 3491 | match item yes yes yes yes - - yes |
| 3492 | region item start yes - yes - yes - yes |
| 3493 | region item skip - yes - - - - yes |
| 3494 | region item end - yes - yes - yes yes |
| 3495 | |
| 3496 | Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: > |
| 3497 | :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1 |
| 3498 | < |
| 3499 | some "string" text |
| 3500 | ^^^^^^ highlighted |
| 3501 | |
| 3502 | Notes: |
| 3503 | - There must be no white space between the pattern and the character |
| 3504 | offset(s). |
| 3505 | - The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text. |
| 3506 | - A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end |
| 3507 | pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped. |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 3508 | - Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters. |
| 3509 | This didn't work well for multi-byte characters, so it was changed with the |
| 3510 | Vim 7.2 release. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3511 | - The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern |
| 3512 | matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting |
| 3513 | start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e. |
| 3514 | |
| 3515 | Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): > |
| 3516 | :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1 |
| 3517 | < |
| 3518 | /* this is a comment */ |
| 3519 | ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted |
| 3520 | |
| 3521 | A more complicated Example: > |
| 3522 | :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1 |
| 3523 | < |
| 3524 | abcfoostringbarabc |
| 3525 | mmmmmmmmmmm match |
Bram Moolenaar | 4770d09 | 2006-01-12 23:22:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3526 | sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar") |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3527 | |
| 3528 | Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context* |
| 3529 | |
| 3530 | Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility |
| 3531 | with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct |
| 3532 | in the pattern. |
| 3533 | |
| 3534 | The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must |
| 3535 | be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will |
| 3536 | cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing |
| 3537 | characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be |
| 3538 | used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to |
| 3539 | specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: > |
| 3540 | |
| 3541 | :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1 |
| 3542 | :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1 |
| 3543 | :syn match Underline "_\+" |
| 3544 | < |
| 3545 | ___zzzz ___wwww |
| 3546 | ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline |
| 3547 | ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash |
| 3548 | ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash |
| 3549 | |
| 3550 | The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset, |
| 3551 | unless you set "ms" explicitly. |
| 3552 | |
| 3553 | |
| 3554 | Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line* |
| 3555 | |
| 3556 | The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as |
| 3557 | expected, but there are a few exceptions. |
| 3558 | |
| 3559 | When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not |
| 3560 | allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 3561 | following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of |
| 3562 | the match doesn't move to another line. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3563 | |
| 3564 | The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will |
| 3565 | continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is |
| 3566 | matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line |
| 3567 | halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a |
| 3568 | previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern |
| 3569 | is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: > |
| 3570 | x x a |
| 3571 | b x x |
| 3572 | Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters |
| 3573 | after the "\n". |
| 3574 | |
| 3575 | |
| 3576 | External matches *:syn-ext-match* |
| 3577 | |
| 3578 | These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns: |
| 3579 | |
| 3580 | */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* |
| 3581 | \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it is can |
| 3582 | be accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable |
| 3583 | in defining a syntax region start pattern. |
| 3584 | |
| 3585 | */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5* |
| 3586 | \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67* |
| 3587 | Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding |
| 3588 | sub-expression in a previous start pattern match. |
| 3589 | |
| 3590 | Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common |
| 3591 | sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix |
| 3592 | shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression |
| 3593 | items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be |
| 3594 | referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document |
| 3595 | example, for instance, can be done like this: > |
| 3596 | :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$" |
| 3597 | |
| 3598 | As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern, |
| 3599 | it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it |
| 3600 | changes the \1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the |
| 3601 | first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can |
| 3602 | also be used in skip patterns: > |
| 3603 | :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1" |
| 3604 | |
| 3605 | Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and |
| 3606 | indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied |
| 3607 | to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa". |
| 3608 | Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references |
| 3609 | within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one |
| 3610 | sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest |
| 3611 | the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)". |
| 3612 | |
| 3613 | Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches |
| 3614 | cannot be referred to. |
| 3615 | |
| 3616 | ============================================================================== |
| 3617 | 8. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400* |
| 3618 | |
| 3619 | :sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..] |
| 3620 | [add={group-name}..] |
| 3621 | [remove={group-name}..] |
| 3622 | |
| 3623 | This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a |
| 3624 | single name. |
| 3625 | |
| 3626 | contains={group-name}.. |
| 3627 | The cluster is set to the specified list of groups. |
| 3628 | add={group-name}.. |
| 3629 | The specified groups are added to the cluster. |
| 3630 | remove={group-name}.. |
| 3631 | The specified groups are removed from the cluster. |
| 3632 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3633 | A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=.., |
| 3634 | nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use |
| 3635 | this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3636 | |
| 3637 | Example: > |
| 3638 | :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers |
| 3639 | :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2 |
| 3640 | |
| 3641 | As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively |
| 3642 | retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so |
| 3643 | to speak: > |
| 3644 | :syntax keyword A aaa |
| 3645 | :syntax keyword B bbb |
| 3646 | :syntax cluster AandB contains=A |
| 3647 | :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB |
| 3648 | :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff |
| 3649 | |
| 3650 | This also has implications for nested clusters: > |
| 3651 | :syntax keyword A aaa |
| 3652 | :syntax keyword B bbb |
| 3653 | :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B |
| 3654 | :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup |
| 3655 | :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup |
| 3656 | :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup |
| 3657 | :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff |
| 3658 | |
| 3659 | ============================================================================== |
| 3660 | 9. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397* |
| 3661 | |
| 3662 | It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for |
| 3663 | a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in |
| 3664 | two different ways: |
| 3665 | |
| 3666 | - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be |
| 3667 | allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use |
| 3668 | the |:runtime| command: > |
| 3669 | |
| 3670 | " In cpp.vim: |
| 3671 | :runtime! syntax/c.vim |
| 3672 | :unlet b:current_syntax |
| 3673 | |
| 3674 | < - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be |
| 3675 | contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the |
| 3676 | ":syntax include" command: |
| 3677 | |
| 3678 | :sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name} |
| 3679 | |
| 3680 | All syntax items declared in the included file will have the |
| 3681 | "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified, |
| 3682 | all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to |
| 3683 | that list. > |
| 3684 | |
| 3685 | " In perl.vim: |
| 3686 | :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim |
| 3687 | :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod |
| 3688 | < |
| 3689 | When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR" |
| 3690 | or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path |
| 3691 | (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'. |
| 3692 | All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is |
| 3693 | recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file |
| 3694 | with his own version, without replacing the file that does the ":syn |
| 3695 | include". |
| 3696 | |
| 3697 | ============================================================================== |
| 3698 | 10. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404* |
| 3699 | |
| 3700 | Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To |
| 3701 | make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where |
| 3702 | redrawing starts. |
| 3703 | |
| 3704 | :sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...] |
| 3705 | |
| 3706 | There are four ways to synchronize: |
| 3707 | 1. Always parse from the start of the file. |
| 3708 | |:syn-sync-first| |
| 3709 | 2. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can |
| 3710 | figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment. |
| 3711 | |:syn-sync-second| |
| 3712 | 3. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there. |
| 3713 | |:syn-sync-third| |
| 3714 | 4. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on. |
| 3715 | |:syn-sync-fourth| |
| 3716 | |
| 3717 | *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines* |
| 3718 | For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is |
| 3719 | limited by "minlines" and "maxlines". |
| 3720 | |
| 3721 | If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least |
| 3722 | that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few |
| 3723 | lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing. |
| 3724 | |
| 3725 | If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched |
| 3726 | for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after |
| 3727 | adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a |
| 3728 | slow machine. Example: > |
| 3729 | :syntax sync ccomment maxlines=500 |
| 3730 | < |
| 3731 | *:syn-sync-linebreaks* |
| 3732 | When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may |
| 3733 | cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to |
| 3734 | start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with |
| 3735 | the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line |
| 3736 | break use this: > |
| 3737 | :syntax sync linebreaks=1 |
| 3738 | The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a |
| 3739 | change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the |
| 3740 | value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks". |
| 3741 | |
| 3742 | |
| 3743 | First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first* |
| 3744 | > |
| 3745 | :syntax sync fromstart |
| 3746 | |
| 3747 | The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting |
| 3748 | accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text, |
| 3749 | so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However, |
| 3750 | when making changes some part of the next needs to be parsed again (worst |
| 3751 | case: to the end of the file). |
| 3752 | |
| 3753 | Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number. |
| 3754 | |
| 3755 | |
| 3756 | Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment* |
| 3757 | |
| 3758 | For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given. |
| 3759 | Example: > |
| 3760 | :syntax sync ccomment |
| 3761 | |
| 3762 | When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style |
| 3763 | comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be |
| 3764 | used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"! |
| 3765 | An alternate group name can be specified, for example: > |
| 3766 | :syntax sync ccomment javaComment |
| 3767 | This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be |
| 3768 | used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that |
| 3769 | region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/". |
| 3770 | |
| 3771 | The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of |
| 3772 | lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of |
| 3773 | lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few |
| 3774 | lines, but it hard to sync on). |
| 3775 | |
| 3776 | Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used |
| 3777 | that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line |
| 3778 | is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the |
| 3779 | chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction |
| 3780 | is hardly ever noticed. |
| 3781 | |
| 3782 | |
| 3783 | Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third* |
| 3784 | |
| 3785 | For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given. |
| 3786 | Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This |
| 3787 | means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower. |
| 3788 | Example: > |
| 3789 | :syntax sync minlines=50 |
| 3790 | |
| 3791 | "lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions). |
| 3792 | |
| 3793 | |
| 3794 | Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth* |
| 3795 | |
| 3796 | The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a |
| 3797 | sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some |
| 3798 | region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search |
| 3799 | starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there |
| 3800 | the search continues backwards in the file. |
| 3801 | |
| 3802 | This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained |
| 3803 | matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences: |
| 3804 | - Keywords cannot be used. |
| 3805 | - The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group |
| 3806 | of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups. |
| 3807 | - The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of |
| 3808 | forwards. |
| 3809 | - A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group |
| 3810 | of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the |
| 3811 | search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the |
| 3812 | consecutive that contain the continuation pattern. |
| 3813 | - When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or |
| 3814 | group of continued lines). |
| 3815 | - When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of |
| 3816 | continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the |
| 3817 | line (or group of continued lines). |
| 3818 | - When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of |
| 3819 | continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used. |
| 3820 | This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region |
| 3821 | (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used). |
| 3822 | |
| 3823 | There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used: |
| 3824 | 1. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the |
| 3825 | search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected |
| 3826 | to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions |
| 3827 | that cross lines cannot contain other regions. |
| 3828 | 2. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group |
| 3829 | that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified. |
| 3830 | This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much |
| 3831 | slower, because more text needs to be parsed. |
| 3832 | Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time. |
| 3833 | |
| 3834 | Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to |
| 3835 | avoid finding unwanted matches. |
| 3836 | |
| 3837 | [The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the |
| 3838 | search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the |
| 3839 | highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much) |
| 3840 | faster.] |
| 3841 | |
| 3842 | *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394* |
| 3843 | :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" .. |
| 3844 | |
| 3845 | Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the |
| 3846 | name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing |
| 3847 | of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region |
| 3848 | must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used. |
| 3849 | "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match. |
| 3850 | |
| 3851 | *syn-sync-groupthere* |
| 3852 | :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" .. |
| 3853 | |
| 3854 | Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that |
| 3855 | is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync |
| 3856 | point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync |
| 3857 | pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting. |
| 3858 | For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If |
| 3859 | "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the |
| 3860 | "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you |
| 3861 | are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice |
| 3862 | it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear |
| 3863 | inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...). |
| 3864 | |
| 3865 | :syntax sync match .. |
| 3866 | :syntax sync region .. |
| 3867 | |
| 3868 | Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is |
| 3869 | skipped while searching for a sync point. |
| 3870 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3871 | *syn-sync-linecont* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3872 | :syntax sync linecont {pattern} |
| 3873 | |
| 3874 | When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in |
| 3875 | the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will |
| 3876 | consider the lines to be concatenated. |
| 3877 | |
| 3878 | If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are |
| 3879 | searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very |
| 3880 | few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: > |
| 3881 | :syntax sync maxlines=100 |
| 3882 | |
| 3883 | You can clear all sync settings with: > |
| 3884 | :syntax sync clear |
| 3885 | |
| 3886 | You can clear specific sync patterns with: > |
| 3887 | :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} .. |
| 3888 | |
| 3889 | ============================================================================== |
| 3890 | 11. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list* |
| 3891 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 482aaeb | 2005-09-29 18:26:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3892 | This command lists all the syntax items: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3893 | |
| 3894 | :sy[ntax] [list] |
| 3895 | |
| 3896 | To show the syntax items for one syntax group: > |
| 3897 | |
| 3898 | :sy[ntax] list {group-name} |
| 3899 | |
| 3900 | To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* > |
| 3901 | |
| 3902 | :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name} |
| 3903 | |
| 3904 | See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command. |
| 3905 | |
| 3906 | Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn" |
| 3907 | is mostly used, because it looks better. |
| 3908 | |
| 3909 | ============================================================================== |
| 3910 | 12. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415* |
| 3911 | |
| 3912 | There are three types of highlight groups: |
| 3913 | - The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the |
| 3914 | name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are |
| 3915 | linked to a group of the second type. |
| 3916 | - The ones used for all syntax languages. |
| 3917 | - The ones used for the 'highlight' option. |
| 3918 | *hitest.vim* |
| 3919 | You can see all the groups currently active with this command: > |
| 3920 | :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim |
| 3921 | This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed |
| 3922 | in their own color. |
| 3923 | |
| 3924 | *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185* |
Bram Moolenaar | 00a927d | 2010-05-14 23:24:24 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3925 | :colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme. |
| 3926 | This is basically the same as > |
| 3927 | :echo g:colors_name |
| 3928 | < In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will |
| 3929 | output "default". When compiled without the |+eval| |
| 3930 | feature it will output "unknown". |
| 3931 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3932 | :colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath' |
| 3933 | for the file "colors/{name}.vim. The first one that |
| 3934 | is found is loaded. |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 3935 | To see the name of the currently active color scheme: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 00a927d | 2010-05-14 23:24:24 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3936 | :colo |
| 3937 | < The name is also stored in the g:colors_name variable. |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 3938 | Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3939 | ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script. |
Bram Moolenaar | cfbc5ee | 2004-07-02 15:38:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3940 | After the color scheme has been loaded the |
| 3941 | |ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered. |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3942 | For info about writing a colorscheme file: > |
| 3943 | :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3944 | |
| 3945 | :hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have |
| 3946 | attributes set. |
| 3947 | |
| 3948 | :hi[ghlight] {group-name} |
| 3949 | List one highlight group. |
| 3950 | |
| 3951 | :hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all |
| 3952 | highlighting for groups added by the user! |
| 3953 | Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which |
| 3954 | default colors to use. |
| 3955 | |
| 3956 | :hi[ghlight] clear {group-name} |
| 3957 | :hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE |
| 3958 | Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It |
| 3959 | is _not_ set back to the default colors. |
| 3960 | |
| 3961 | :hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} .. |
| 3962 | Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for |
| 3963 | an existing group. |
| 3964 | See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments. |
| 3965 | See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default] |
| 3966 | argument. |
| 3967 | |
| 3968 | Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the |
| 3969 | default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional |
| 3970 | highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default |
| 3971 | values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to |
| 3972 | the default value. |
| 3973 | |
| 3974 | A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads |
| 3975 | a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: > |
| 3976 | |
| 3977 | :hi Comment gui=bold |
| 3978 | |
| 3979 | Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the |
| 3980 | specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the |
| 3981 | result is like this single command has been used: > |
| 3982 | :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold |
| 3983 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3984 | *:highlight-verbose* |
Bram Moolenaar | 661b182 | 2005-07-28 22:36:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3985 | When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will |
| 3986 | also tell where it was last set. Example: > |
| 3987 | :verbose hi Comment |
| 3988 | < Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3989 | Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 661b182 | 2005-07-28 22:36:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3990 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8aff23a | 2005-08-19 20:40:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3991 | When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be |
| 3992 | mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information. |
Bram Moolenaar | 661b182 | 2005-07-28 22:36:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3993 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3994 | *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423* |
| 3995 | There are three types of terminals for highlighting: |
| 3996 | term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm) |
| 3997 | cterm a color terminal (MS-DOS console, color-xterm, these have the "Co" |
| 3998 | termcap entry) |
| 3999 | gui the GUI |
| 4000 | |
| 4001 | For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use |
| 4002 | the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting. |
| 4003 | |
| 4004 | 1. highlight arguments for normal terminals |
| 4005 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 75c50c4 | 2005-06-04 22:06:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4006 | *bold* *underline* *undercurl* |
| 4007 | *inverse* *italic* *standout* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4008 | term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418* |
| 4009 | attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the |
| 4010 | following items (in any order): |
| 4011 | bold |
| 4012 | underline |
Bram Moolenaar | 5409c05 | 2005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4013 | undercurl not always available |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4014 | reverse |
| 4015 | inverse same as reverse |
| 4016 | italic |
| 4017 | standout |
| 4018 | NONE no attributes used (used to reset it) |
| 4019 | |
| 4020 | Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They |
| 4021 | have the same effect. |
Bram Moolenaar | 5409c05 | 2005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4022 | "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible |
| 4023 | then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" is only available in |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4024 | the GUI. The color is set with |highlight-guisp|. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4025 | |
| 4026 | start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422* |
| 4027 | stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop* |
| 4028 | These lists of terminal codes can be used to get |
| 4029 | non-standard attributes on a terminal. |
| 4030 | |
| 4031 | The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument |
| 4032 | is written before the characters in the highlighted |
| 4033 | area. It can be anything that you want to send to the |
| 4034 | terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence |
| 4035 | specified with the "stop" argument is written after the |
| 4036 | highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument. |
| 4037 | Otherwise the screen will look messed up. |
| 4038 | |
| 4039 | The {term-list} can have two forms: |
| 4040 | |
| 4041 | 1. A string with escape sequences. |
| 4042 | This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with |
| 4043 | "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized |
| 4044 | here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example: |
| 4045 | start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r; |
| 4046 | |
| 4047 | 2. A list of terminal codes. |
| 4048 | Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of |
| 4049 | the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas. |
| 4050 | White space is not allowed. Example: |
| 4051 | start=t_C1,t_BL |
| 4052 | The terminal codes must exist for this to work. |
| 4053 | |
| 4054 | |
| 4055 | 2. highlight arguments for color terminals |
| 4056 | |
| 4057 | cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm* |
| 4058 | See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|. |
| 4059 | The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when |
| 4060 | colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could |
| 4061 | be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue. |
| 4062 | Note: Many terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes |
| 4063 | with coloring. Use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg=" OR "ctermbg=". |
| 4064 | |
| 4065 | ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421* |
| 4066 | ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg* |
| 4067 | The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to |
| 4068 | (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co". |
| 4069 | The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal |
| 4070 | and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of |
| 4071 | "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives |
| 4072 | another color, on others you just get color 3. |
| 4073 | |
| 4074 | For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit |
| 4075 | unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The |
| 4076 | colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file. |
| 4077 | Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors |
| 4078 | for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms. |
| 4079 | |
| 4080 | The MSDOS standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so these |
| 4081 | have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in X11 |
| 4082 | are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the |
| 4083 | highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The |
| 4084 | following names are recognized, with the color number used: |
| 4085 | |
| 4086 | *cterm-colors* |
| 4087 | NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~ |
| 4088 | 0 0 Black |
| 4089 | 1 4 DarkBlue |
| 4090 | 2 2 DarkGreen |
| 4091 | 3 6 DarkCyan |
| 4092 | 4 1 DarkRed |
| 4093 | 5 5 DarkMagenta |
| 4094 | 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow |
| 4095 | 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey |
| 4096 | 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey |
| 4097 | 9 4* Blue, LightBlue |
| 4098 | 10 2* Green, LightGreen |
| 4099 | 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan |
| 4100 | 12 1* Red, LightRed |
| 4101 | 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta |
| 4102 | 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow |
| 4103 | 15 7* White |
| 4104 | |
| 4105 | The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co' |
| 4106 | greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for |
| 4107 | 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the |
| 4108 | bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g., |
| 4109 | "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work |
| 4110 | for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed. |
| 4111 | If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a |
| 4112 | "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use |
| 4113 | a number instead of a color name. |
| 4114 | |
| 4115 | The case of the color names is ignored. |
| 4116 | Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4117 | numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4118 | is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc. |
| 4119 | |
| 4120 | Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong |
| 4121 | colors! |
| 4122 | |
| 4123 | *:hi-normal-cterm* |
| 4124 | When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group, |
| 4125 | these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text. |
| 4126 | Example: > |
| 4127 | :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue |
| 4128 | < When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the |
| 4129 | 'background' option will be adjusted automatically. This causes the |
| 4130 | highlight groups that depend on 'background' to change! This means |
| 4131 | you should set the colors for Normal first, before setting other |
| 4132 | colors. |
| 4133 | When a colorscheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to |
| 4134 | be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 4135 | delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4136 | |
| 4137 | When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim |
| 4138 | needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op" |
| 4139 | termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the |
| 4140 | 't_op' option in your .vimrc. |
| 4141 | *E419* *E420* |
| 4142 | When Vim knows the normal foreground and background colors, "fg" and |
| 4143 | "bg" can be used as color names. This only works after setting the |
| 4144 | colors for the Normal group and for the MS-DOS console. Example, for |
| 4145 | reverse video: > |
| 4146 | :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg |
| 4147 | < Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this |
| 4148 | command are given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the |
| 4149 | "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted. |
| 4150 | |
| 4151 | |
| 4152 | 3. highlight arguments for the GUI |
| 4153 | |
| 4154 | gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui* |
| 4155 | These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode. |
| 4156 | See |attr-list| for a description. |
| 4157 | Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They |
| 4158 | have the same effect. |
| 4159 | Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group. |
| 4160 | |
| 4161 | font={font-name} *highlight-font* |
| 4162 | font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim |
| 4163 | runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: > |
| 4164 | font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1 |
| 4165 | < |
| 4166 | The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font. |
| 4167 | When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default |
| 4168 | font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is |
| 4169 | used). |
| 4170 | The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs: |
| 4171 | When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed. |
| 4172 | When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be |
| 4173 | changed. |
| 4174 | All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same |
| 4175 | character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will |
| 4176 | occur. |
| 4177 | |
| 4178 | guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg* |
| 4179 | guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg* |
Bram Moolenaar | 5409c05 | 2005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4180 | guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp* |
| 4181 | These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special |
Bram Moolenaar | 7df351e | 2006-01-23 22:30:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4182 | (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl. |
| 4183 | There are a few special names: |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4184 | NONE no color (transparent) |
| 4185 | bg use normal background color |
| 4186 | background use normal background color |
| 4187 | fg use normal foreground color |
| 4188 | foreground use normal foreground color |
| 4189 | To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character, |
| 4190 | put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then. |
| 4191 | Example: > |
| 4192 | :hi comment guifg='salmon pink' |
| 4193 | < |
| 4194 | *gui-colors* |
| 4195 | Suggested color names (these are available on most systems): |
| 4196 | Red LightRed DarkRed |
| 4197 | Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen |
| 4198 | Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue |
| 4199 | Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan |
| 4200 | Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta |
| 4201 | Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow |
| 4202 | Gray LightGray DarkGray |
| 4203 | Black White |
| 4204 | Orange Purple Violet |
| 4205 | |
| 4206 | In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See |
| 4207 | |win32-colors|. |
| 4208 | |
| 4209 | You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values. |
| 4210 | The format is "#rrggbb", where |
| 4211 | "rr" is the Red value |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4212 | "gg" is the Green value |
Bram Moolenaar | 5409c05 | 2005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4213 | "bb" is the Blue value |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4214 | All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: > |
| 4215 | :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff |
| 4216 | < |
| 4217 | *highlight-groups* *highlight-default* |
| 4218 | These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the |
| 4219 | 'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value |
| 4220 | of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight" |
| 4221 | command. |
Bram Moolenaar | 1a38442 | 2010-07-14 19:53:30 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4222 | *hl-ColorColumn* |
| 4223 | ColorColumn used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn' |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4224 | *hl-Conceal* |
| 4225 | Conceal placeholder characters substituted for concealed |
| 4226 | text (see 'conceallevel') |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4227 | *hl-Cursor* |
| 4228 | Cursor the character under the cursor |
| 4229 | *hl-CursorIM* |
| 4230 | CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM| |
Bram Moolenaar | 5316eee | 2006-03-12 22:11:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4231 | *hl-CursorColumn* |
| 4232 | CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is |
| 4233 | set |
| 4234 | *hl-CursorLine* |
| 4235 | CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is |
| 4236 | set |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4237 | *hl-Directory* |
| 4238 | Directory directory names (and other special names in listings) |
| 4239 | *hl-DiffAdd* |
| 4240 | DiffAdd diff mode: Added line |diff.txt| |
| 4241 | *hl-DiffChange* |
| 4242 | DiffChange diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt| |
| 4243 | *hl-DiffDelete* |
| 4244 | DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt| |
| 4245 | *hl-DiffText* |
| 4246 | DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt| |
| 4247 | *hl-ErrorMsg* |
| 4248 | ErrorMsg error messages on the command line |
| 4249 | *hl-VertSplit* |
| 4250 | VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows |
| 4251 | *hl-Folded* |
| 4252 | Folded line used for closed folds |
| 4253 | *hl-FoldColumn* |
| 4254 | FoldColumn 'foldcolumn' |
| 4255 | *hl-SignColumn* |
| 4256 | SignColumn column where |signs| are displayed |
| 4257 | *hl-IncSearch* |
| 4258 | IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with |
| 4259 | ":s///c" |
| 4260 | *hl-LineNr* |
Bram Moolenaar | fd2ac76 | 2006-03-01 22:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4261 | LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number' |
Bram Moolenaar | 6448667 | 2010-05-16 15:46:46 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4262 | or 'relativenumber' option is set. |
Bram Moolenaar | fd2ac76 | 2006-03-01 22:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4263 | *hl-MatchParen* |
| 4264 | MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it |
| 4265 | is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt| |
| 4266 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4267 | *hl-ModeMsg* |
| 4268 | ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --") |
| 4269 | *hl-MoreMsg* |
| 4270 | MoreMsg |more-prompt| |
| 4271 | *hl-NonText* |
| 4272 | NonText '~' and '@' at the end of the window, characters from |
| 4273 | 'showbreak' and other characters that do not really exist in |
| 4274 | the text (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character |
| 4275 | doesn't fit at the end of the line). |
| 4276 | *hl-Normal* |
| 4277 | Normal normal text |
Bram Moolenaar | 1c7715d | 2005-10-03 22:02:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4278 | *hl-Pmenu* |
| 4279 | Pmenu Popup menu: normal item. |
| 4280 | *hl-PmenuSel* |
| 4281 | PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item. |
| 4282 | *hl-PmenuSbar* |
| 4283 | PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar. |
| 4284 | *hl-PmenuThumb* |
| 4285 | PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4286 | *hl-Question* |
| 4287 | Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions |
| 4288 | *hl-Search* |
| 4289 | Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch'). |
| 4290 | Also used for highlighting the current line in the quickfix |
| 4291 | window and similar items that need to stand out. |
| 4292 | *hl-SpecialKey* |
| 4293 | SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used |
| 4294 | to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'. |
| 4295 | Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it |
| 4296 | really is. |
Bram Moolenaar | 217ad92 | 2005-03-20 22:37:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4297 | *hl-SpellBad* |
| 4298 | SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell| |
| 4299 | This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. |
Bram Moolenaar | 53180ce | 2005-07-05 21:48:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4300 | *hl-SpellCap* |
| 4301 | SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell| |
| 4302 | This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. |
Bram Moolenaar | 217ad92 | 2005-03-20 22:37:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4303 | *hl-SpellLocal* |
| 4304 | SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is |
| 4305 | used in another region. |spell| |
| 4306 | This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. |
| 4307 | *hl-SpellRare* |
| 4308 | SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is |
| 4309 | hardly ever used. |spell| |
| 4310 | This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4311 | *hl-StatusLine* |
| 4312 | StatusLine status line of current window |
| 4313 | *hl-StatusLineNC* |
| 4314 | StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows |
| 4315 | Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in |
| 4316 | the status line of the current window. |
Bram Moolenaar | faa959a | 2006-02-20 21:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4317 | *hl-TabLine* |
| 4318 | TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label |
| 4319 | *hl-TabLineFill* |
| 4320 | TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels |
| 4321 | *hl-TabLineSel* |
| 4322 | TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4323 | *hl-Title* |
| 4324 | Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc. |
| 4325 | *hl-Visual* |
| 4326 | Visual Visual mode selection |
| 4327 | *hl-VisualNOS* |
| 4328 | VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection". |
| 4329 | Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this. |
| 4330 | *hl-WarningMsg* |
| 4331 | WarningMsg warning messages |
| 4332 | *hl-WildMenu* |
| 4333 | WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion |
| 4334 | |
Bram Moolenaar | f75a963 | 2005-09-13 21:20:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4335 | *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4336 | The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4337 | statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4338 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4339 | For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu, |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4340 | scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the |
| 4341 | Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg, |
| 4342 | and guifg. |
| 4343 | |
| 4344 | *hl-Menu* |
| 4345 | Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus. |
| 4346 | Also used for the toolbar. |
| 4347 | Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg. |
| 4348 | |
| 4349 | NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually |
| 4350 | specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is |
| 4351 | empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when |
| 4352 | set. |
| 4353 | |
| 4354 | *hl-Scrollbar* |
| 4355 | Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's |
| 4356 | scrollbars. |
| 4357 | Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg. |
| 4358 | |
| 4359 | *hl-Tooltip* |
| 4360 | Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips. |
| 4361 | Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg. |
| 4362 | |
| 4363 | NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually |
| 4364 | specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is |
| 4365 | empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when |
| 4366 | set. |
| 4367 | |
| 4368 | ============================================================================== |
| 4369 | 13. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413* |
| 4370 | |
| 4371 | When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you |
| 4372 | can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight |
| 4373 | group, and give the color attributes only for that group. |
| 4374 | |
| 4375 | To set a link: |
| 4376 | |
| 4377 | :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group} |
| 4378 | |
| 4379 | To remove a link: |
| 4380 | |
| 4381 | :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE |
| 4382 | |
| 4383 | Notes: *E414* |
| 4384 | - If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You |
| 4385 | don't get an error message for a non-existing group. |
| 4386 | - As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is |
| 4387 | removed. |
| 4388 | - If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is |
| 4389 | not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a |
| 4390 | sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip |
| 4391 | links for groups that already have settings. |
| 4392 | |
| 4393 | *:hi-default* *:highlight-default* |
| 4394 | The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a |
| 4395 | group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command |
| 4396 | will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link. |
| 4397 | |
| 4398 | Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a |
| 4399 | specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: > |
| 4400 | :highlight default link cComment Comment |
| 4401 | If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: > |
| 4402 | :highlight link cComment Question |
| 4403 | Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be |
| 4404 | overruled when the syntax file is loaded. |
| 4405 | |
| 4406 | ============================================================================== |
| 4407 | 14. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391* |
| 4408 | |
| 4409 | If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this |
| 4410 | command: > |
| 4411 | :syntax clear |
| 4412 | |
| 4413 | This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting, |
| 4414 | or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed |
| 4415 | in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that |
| 4416 | load the syntax file. |
| 4417 | The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is |
| 4418 | loaded after this command. |
| 4419 | |
| 4420 | If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove |
| 4421 | the autocommands that load the syntax files: > |
| 4422 | :syntax off |
| 4423 | |
| 4424 | What this command actually does, is executing the command > |
| 4425 | :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim |
| 4426 | See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work |
| 4427 | $VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|. |
| 4428 | |
| 4429 | To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: > |
| 4430 | :syntax clear {group-name} .. |
| 4431 | This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}. |
| 4432 | |
| 4433 | To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: > |
| 4434 | :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} .. |
| 4435 | This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list. |
| 4436 | |
| 4437 | *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset* |
| 4438 | If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the |
| 4439 | defaults back: > |
| 4440 | |
| 4441 | :syntax reset |
| 4442 | |
| 4443 | This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option. |
| 4444 | |
| 4445 | Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset |
| 4446 | back to their Vim default. |
| 4447 | Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color |
| 4448 | scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost. |
| 4449 | |
| 4450 | What this actually does is: > |
| 4451 | |
| 4452 | let g:syntax_cmd = "reset" |
| 4453 | runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim |
| 4454 | |
| 4455 | Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option. |
| 4456 | |
| 4457 | *syncolor* |
| 4458 | If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim |
| 4459 | script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in |
| 4460 | 'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule |
| 4461 | the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax |
| 4462 | reset" command. |
| 4463 | |
| 4464 | For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: > |
| 4465 | |
| 4466 | if &background == "light" |
| 4467 | highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen |
| 4468 | else |
| 4469 | highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green |
| 4470 | endif |
| 4471 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c0197e2 | 2004-09-13 20:26:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4472 | *E679* |
| 4473 | Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the |
| 4474 | 'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an |
| 4475 | endless loop. |
| 4476 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4477 | Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether |
| 4478 | your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This |
| 4479 | depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|. |
| 4480 | |
| 4481 | *syntax_cmd* |
| 4482 | The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the |
| 4483 | syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded: |
| 4484 | "on" ":syntax on" command. Highlight colors are overruled but |
| 4485 | links are kept |
| 4486 | "enable" ":syntax enable" command. Only define colors for groups that |
| 4487 | don't have highlighting yet. Use ":syntax default". |
| 4488 | "reset" ":syntax reset" command or loading a color scheme. Define all |
| 4489 | the colors. |
| 4490 | "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a |
| 4491 | syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set |
| 4492 | them. |
| 4493 | |
| 4494 | ============================================================================== |
| 4495 | 15. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight* |
| 4496 | |
| 4497 | If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following |
| 4498 | mappings. |
| 4499 | |
| 4500 | <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags. |
| 4501 | <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file. |
| 4502 | > |
| 4503 | :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12> |
| 4504 | :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR> |
| 4505 | |
| 4506 | WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more |
| 4507 | memory Vim will consume. |
| 4508 | |
| 4509 | Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you |
| 4510 | must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net). |
| 4511 | |
| 4512 | Put these lines in your Makefile: |
| 4513 | |
| 4514 | # Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk |
| 4515 | types: types.vim |
| 4516 | types.vim: *.[ch] |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4517 | ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\ |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4518 | awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\ |
| 4519 | {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@ |
| 4520 | |
| 4521 | And put these lines in your .vimrc: > |
| 4522 | |
| 4523 | " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists |
| 4524 | autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim' |
| 4525 | autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname) |
| 4526 | autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' . fname |
| 4527 | autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif |
| 4528 | |
| 4529 | ============================================================================== |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4530 | 16. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax* |
| 4531 | |
| 4532 | Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is |
| 4533 | possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own |
| 4534 | private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source |
| 4535 | with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source |
| 4536 | highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold, |
| 4537 | italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here. |
| 4538 | |
| 4539 | To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other |
| 4540 | windows on the buffer: > |
| 4541 | :ownsyntax foo |
Bram Moolenaar | debe25a | 2010-06-06 17:41:24 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4542 | < *w:current_syntax* |
| 4543 | This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of |
| 4544 | "b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and |
| 4545 | restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set |
| 4546 | "b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to |
| 4547 | "w:current_syntax". |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4548 | |
| 4549 | Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows |
| 4550 | on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely, |
| 4551 | syntax commands executed from that window do not effect other windows on the |
| 4552 | same buffer. |
| 4553 | |
Bram Moolenaar | debe25a | 2010-06-06 17:41:24 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4554 | A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer |
| 4555 | is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded. |
| 4556 | When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax. |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4557 | |
| 4558 | ============================================================================== |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4559 | 16. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm* |
| 4560 | |
| 4561 | Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the |
| 4562 | default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: > |
| 4563 | :if &term =~ "xterm" |
| 4564 | : if has("terminfo") |
| 4565 | : set t_Co=8 |
| 4566 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm |
| 4567 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm |
| 4568 | : else |
| 4569 | : set t_Co=8 |
| 4570 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm |
| 4571 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm |
| 4572 | : endif |
| 4573 | :endif |
| 4574 | < [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] |
| 4575 | |
| 4576 | You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal, |
| 4577 | e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm". |
| 4578 | |
| 4579 | Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may |
| 4580 | be wrong. |
| 4581 | *xiterm* *rxvt* |
| 4582 | The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too. |
| 4583 | But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: > |
| 4584 | :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm |
| 4585 | :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm |
| 4586 | < |
| 4587 | *colortest.vim* |
| 4588 | To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution. |
Bram Moolenaar | f740b29 | 2006-02-16 22:11:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4589 | To use it, execute this command: > |
| 4590 | :runtime syntax/colortest.vim |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4591 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4592 | Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4593 | output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined |
| 4594 | at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground |
| 4595 | colors, when 't_Co' is 8. |
| 4596 | |
| 4597 | *xfree-xterm* |
| 4598 | To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4599 | included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4600 | at: > |
| 4601 | http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html |
| 4602 | Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the |
| 4603 | termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it |
| 4604 | supports. > |
| 4605 | ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query |
| 4606 | If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings. |
| 4607 | (Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding). |
| 4608 | |
| 4609 | This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): > |
| 4610 | :if has("terminfo") |
| 4611 | : set t_Co=16 |
| 4612 | : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm |
| 4613 | : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm |
| 4614 | :else |
| 4615 | : set t_Co=16 |
| 4616 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm |
| 4617 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm |
| 4618 | :endif |
| 4619 | < [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] |
| 4620 | |
| 4621 | Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically |
| 4622 | translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm". |
| 4623 | Colors above 16 are also translated automatically. |
| 4624 | |
| 4625 | For 256 colors this has been reported to work: > |
| 4626 | |
| 4627 | :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm |
| 4628 | :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm |
| 4629 | |
| 4630 | Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color" |
| 4631 | and try if that works. |
| 4632 | |
| 4633 | You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file): |
| 4634 | XTerm*color0: #000000 |
| 4635 | XTerm*color1: #c00000 |
| 4636 | XTerm*color2: #008000 |
| 4637 | XTerm*color3: #808000 |
| 4638 | XTerm*color4: #0000c0 |
| 4639 | XTerm*color5: #c000c0 |
| 4640 | XTerm*color6: #008080 |
| 4641 | XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0 |
| 4642 | XTerm*color8: #808080 |
| 4643 | XTerm*color9: #ff6060 |
| 4644 | XTerm*color10: #00ff00 |
| 4645 | XTerm*color11: #ffff00 |
| 4646 | XTerm*color12: #8080ff |
| 4647 | XTerm*color13: #ff40ff |
| 4648 | XTerm*color14: #00ffff |
| 4649 | XTerm*color15: #ffffff |
| 4650 | Xterm*cursorColor: Black |
| 4651 | |
| 4652 | [Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the |
| 4653 | cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4654 | newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.] |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4655 | |
| 4656 | To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database |
| 4657 | Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): > |
| 4658 | xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults |
| 4659 | < |
| 4660 | *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor* |
| 4661 | To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas |
| 4662 | Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with |
| 4663 | these resources: |
| 4664 | XTerm*cursorBlink: on |
| 4665 | XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400 |
| 4666 | XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250 |
| 4667 | XTerm*cursorColor: White |
| 4668 | |
| 4669 | *hpterm-color* |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4670 | These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4671 | foreground colors: > |
| 4672 | :if has("terminfo") |
| 4673 | : set t_Co=8 |
| 4674 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS |
| 4675 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S |
| 4676 | :else |
| 4677 | : set t_Co=8 |
| 4678 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS |
| 4679 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S |
| 4680 | :endif |
| 4681 | < [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] |
| 4682 | |
| 4683 | *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal* |
| 4684 | These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal |
| 4685 | emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the |
| 4686 | bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. > |
| 4687 | :set t_Co=16 |
| 4688 | :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m |
| 4689 | :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m |
| 4690 | < |
| 4691 | *TTpro-telnet* |
| 4692 | These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware / |
| 4693 | open-source program for MS-Windows. > |
| 4694 | set t_Co=16 |
| 4695 | set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm |
| 4696 | set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm |
| 4697 | Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure |
| 4698 | that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled. |
| 4699 | (info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>) |
| 4700 | |
| 4701 | vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:ft=help:norl: |